1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
42 % for customized page headers/footers
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
45 % change header rule width
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
55 \use_default_options false
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
62 \language_package default
67 \font_typewriter default
68 \font_default_family default
69 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \default_output_format default
78 \bibtex_command default
79 \index_command default
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
99 \use_package amsmath 1
100 \use_package amssymb 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 0
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type numerical
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation indent
133 \paragraph_indentation default
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes true
139 \output_changes false
144 \author 2090807402 "usti"
158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
160 If you have comments or error corrections, please send them to the LyX Documenta
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
201 \begin_layout Standard
202 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
203 LatexCommand tableofcontents
210 \begin_layout Chapter
214 \begin_layout Section
218 \begin_layout Standard
219 LyX is a document preparation system.
220 It is a tool for producing beautiful manuscripts, publishable books, business
221 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
222 It is unlike most other
223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
230 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
232 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
248 pt type, left justified, 5
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
257 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you, so you deal only with concepts,
261 \begin_layout Standard
262 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
275 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
279 \begin_layout Standard
281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
292 describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most importantly,
293 the format of all of the manuals.
294 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
295 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
312 \begin_layout Section
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
319 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
320 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
324 \begin_layout Standard
325 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
326 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
327 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
329 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
330 only a vertical scrollbar.
331 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
332 The first case is large images.
333 To avoid that they are displayed larger than your screen, use in the image
340 LaTeX and LyX options
343 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
345 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
346 this doesn't work for equations yet.
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
358 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
365 \begin_layout Section
369 \begin_layout Standard
370 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
371 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
372 Just select the manual you want to read from the
379 \begin_layout Section
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
407 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
408 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
410 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
411 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
416 \begin_inset space \space{}
419 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
420 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
422 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
426 \begin_inset Index idx
429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
430 Reconfiguration of LyX
435 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
438 \begin_layout Section
440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
442 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
449 \begin_layout Standard
450 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
451 not to able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
453 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the `backend' that can produce
454 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
461 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
462 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
465 \begin_layout Standard
466 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
467 you can view from the menu
469 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
488 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
489 reconfigure LyX (menu
491 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
495 \begin_inset Note Note
498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
499 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
507 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
508 More about TeX Code is described in section
513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
515 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
519 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
526 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
536 \begin_inset Index idx
539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
540 Reconfiguration of LyX
545 See section 5.1 of the
549 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
552 \begin_layout Chapter
556 \begin_layout Section
557 Basic File Operations
558 \begin_inset Index idx
561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
570 \begin_layout Standard
575 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
576 in addition to some more advanced operations:
579 \begin_layout Itemize
591 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
621 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
639 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \begin_layout Itemize
679 \begin_layout Itemize
685 \begin_layout Itemize
691 arg "dialog-show print"
697 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Standard
704 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
705 a few minor differences.
708 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
723 command not only prompts you for a name for the new file, but also prompts
724 you for a template to use.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
776 space is just that — a big, blank space.
784 \begin_layout Standard
805 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time
809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
810 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
835 will reload the document from disk.
836 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
837 and want to restore it to the last save.
846 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
847 them as your changes.
850 \begin_layout Section
851 Basic Editing Features
852 \begin_inset Index idx
855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
864 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
871 \begin_layout Standard
872 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
873 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
874 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
875 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
905 \begin_layout Itemize
919 \begin_layout Itemize
933 \begin_layout Itemize
943 \begin_layout Itemize
953 \begin_layout Itemize
969 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
975 \begin_layout Standard
976 The first three are self-explanatory.
978 \begin_inset Index idx
981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
987 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
996 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
999 \begin_layout Standard
1002 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1007 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1009 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_inset space ~
1018 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1024 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1033 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
1034 will start a new paragraph.
1037 \begin_layout Standard
1038 \begin_inset Index idx
1041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1048 \begin_inset Index idx
1051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1059 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1073 \begin_inset space ~
1077 \begin_inset space ~
1083 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1088 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1091 \begin_inset space ~
1100 \begin_inset space ~
1105 button to skip the current word.
1109 \begin_inset space ~
1114 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1125 If the toggle is set, searching for
1126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1137 will not match the word
1138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1152 Match whole words only
1154 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1183 LyX offers also an advanced
1186 \begin_inset space ~
1190 \begin_inset space ~
1195 feature that is described in sec.
1196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1202 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1209 \begin_layout Standard
1210 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1211 \begin_inset space \space{}
1215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1223 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1225 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1230 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1237 \begin_layout Standard
1238 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1241 arg "inset-select-all"
1247 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1250 selects the whole document.
1253 \begin_layout Section
1255 \begin_inset Index idx
1258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1265 \begin_inset Index idx
1268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1277 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1284 \begin_layout Standard
1285 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1286 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1289 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1292 or the toolbar button
1298 to undo some mistake.
1299 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1301 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1304 or the toolbar button
1311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1318 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1322 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1325 \begin_layout Standard
1326 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive to the document as it
1328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1336 This is a consequence of the 100
1337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1340 step undo limit, above.
1343 \begin_layout Standard
1352 work on almost everything in LyX.
1353 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1357 \begin_layout Section
1359 \begin_inset Index idx
1362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1371 \begin_layout Standard
1372 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1375 \begin_layout Enumerate
1380 \begin_layout Itemize
1385 once anywhere in the edit window.
1386 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1390 \begin_layout Enumerate
1395 \begin_layout Itemize
1401 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1404 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1407 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1410 \begin_layout Itemize
1411 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1413 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1420 \begin_layout Enumerate
1421 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1425 \begin_layout Standard
1426 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1427 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1431 \begin_layout Section
1433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1435 name "sec:Navigating"
1440 \begin_inset Index idx
1443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1452 \begin_layout Standard
1453 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1456 \begin_layout Itemize
1461 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1462 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1465 \begin_layout Itemize
1466 The `Outline', which is accessed either by the menu
1468 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1471 or by the toolbar button
1474 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1480 \begin_layout Itemize
1481 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1483 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1486 and use the same menu to return to them.
1487 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1494 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1499 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1500 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1502 \begin_inset space ~
1507 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1508 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1509 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1510 your last editing position.
1513 \begin_layout Standard
1518 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1521 \begin_layout Subsection
1523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1525 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1532 \begin_layout Standard
1533 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1534 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1535 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1543 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1547 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1554 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1559 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1563 \begin_layout Standard
1564 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1565 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1566 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1567 dialog and to modify the citation.
1570 \begin_layout Standard
1571 The `Filter' field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1573 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1574 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1582 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1585 \begin_layout Standard
1586 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1587 you further to control the display.
1592 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1593 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1599 option keeps it in the current view state.
1600 Keeping means that when you have e.
1601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1605 \begin_inset space \space{}
1608 the subsections of section
1609 \begin_inset space ~
1612 2 and 4 shown and click on section
1613 \begin_inset space ~
1616 3, the subsections of section
1617 \begin_inset space ~
1620 2 and 4 will still be shown.
1625 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1626 \begin_inset space ~
1630 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1640 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1643 \begin_layout Standard
1645 \begin_inset space \space{}
1649 \begin_inset Graphics
1650 filename ../images/reload.png
1655 \begin_inset space ~
1658 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1659 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1662 \begin_inset space \space{}
1666 \begin_inset Graphics
1667 filename ../images/down.png
1669 groupId toolbarbuttons
1674 \begin_inset space ~
1678 \begin_inset space \space{}
1682 \begin_inset Graphics
1683 filename ../images/up.png
1685 groupId toolbarbuttons
1690 \begin_inset space ~
1693 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1694 So, for example, you can move section
1695 \begin_inset space ~
1699 \begin_inset space ~
1702 2.4 or after section
1703 \begin_inset space ~
1707 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1709 \begin_inset Graphics
1710 filename ../images/promote.png
1712 groupId toolbarbuttons
1717 \begin_inset Graphics
1718 filename ../images/demote.png
1720 groupId toolbarbuttons
1724 (or the corresponding key bindings
1732 ) you can change the level of sections.
1733 So you can for example make section
1734 \begin_inset space ~
1738 \begin_inset space ~
1742 \begin_inset space ~
1748 \begin_layout Section
1749 Input / Word Completion
1750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1752 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1757 \begin_inset Index idx
1760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1767 \begin_inset Index idx
1770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1801 \begin_layout Standard
1802 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1804 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1805 is used to propose completions.
1808 \begin_layout Standard
1809 The input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1811 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1816 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1823 \begin_inset space ~
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1832 the proposed completion is shown directly behind the cursor.
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1841 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1842 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1852 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1853 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1856 \begin_layout Standard
1857 LyX shows a small triangle behind the cursor as an indicator that there
1858 are completions available.
1863 key to accept a proposed completion.
1864 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1865 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1866 and accept the chosen completion be pressing
1873 \begin_layout Standard
1874 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1875 ing options for text.
1876 The special math option
1880 enables that characters can be composed.
1881 If you for example want to insert the character
1882 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1885 , you can then input the characters
1886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1897 to a formula to get it.
1898 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the usage
1899 of the math toolbar.
1900 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1904 that is somewhere in LyX's installation folder.
1905 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1914 \begin_layout Section
1916 \begin_inset Index idx
1919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1926 \begin_inset Index idx
1929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1992 \begin_layout Standard
1993 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2006 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2008 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2014 \begin_layout Standard
2018 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2047 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2051 \begin_layout Labeling
2052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2056 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2057 LatexCommand nomenclature
2059 description "Tabulator key"
2065 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2066 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2067 \begin_inset space ~
2071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2073 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2080 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2084 , especially section
2085 \begin_inset space ~
2089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2091 reference "sub:Lists"
2097 If you're still confused, look in the
2102 \begin_inset Newline newline
2105 In LyX the Tab key is only used to accept propositions of the input completion.
2108 \begin_layout Labeling
2109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2113 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2114 LatexCommand nomenclature
2116 description "Escape key"
2123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2130 It's used, generically, to cancel operations.
2131 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2134 \begin_layout Labeling
2135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2141 \begin_inset space ~
2145 \begin_inset space ~
2152 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2153 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2157 \begin_layout Standard
2158 There are three modifier keys:
2161 \begin_layout Labeling
2162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2180 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2181 LatexCommand nomenclature
2183 description "Control key"
2187 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2188 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2192 \begin_layout Itemize
2201 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2204 \begin_layout Itemize
2213 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2216 \begin_layout Itemize
2225 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2229 \begin_layout Labeling
2230 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2248 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2249 LatexCommand nomenclature
2251 description "Shift key"
2255 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2256 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2259 \begin_layout Labeling
2260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2278 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2279 LatexCommand nomenclature
2281 description "Alt or Meta key"
2285 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2286 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2287 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2293 \begin_inset Newline newline
2296 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2298 menu accelerator keys
2301 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2302 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2306 \begin_layout Standard
2307 For example, the sequence
2308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2314 \begin_inset space ~
2318 \begin_inset space ~
2324 \begin_inset space ~
2332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2351 \begin_inset space ~
2357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2367 \begin_layout Standard
2372 manual lists all other things bound to the
2380 \begin_layout Standard
2381 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2382 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2383 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2384 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2385 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2386 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2387 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2389 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2405 followed by a capital
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2413 You can list or change the key bindings in the menu
2415 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2420 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2423 as explained in sec.
2424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2430 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2437 \begin_layout Chapter
2439 \begin_inset Index idx
2442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2451 \begin_layout Section
2453 \begin_inset Index idx
2456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2465 \begin_layout Subsection
2469 \begin_layout Standard
2470 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2471 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2472 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2473 numbering schemes, and so on.
2474 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2475 and format the title of your document differently.
2478 \begin_layout Standard
2483 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2484 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2485 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2486 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2487 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2490 \begin_layout Standard
2491 Read on for info about the document classes you can choose from LyX, and
2492 how to adjust their properties.
2495 \begin_layout Subsection
2497 \begin_inset Index idx
2500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2509 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2516 \begin_layout Standard
2517 You can select a class using the
2519 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2520 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2524 \begin_inset Index idx
2527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2534 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2542 \begin_layout Standard
2543 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2547 \begin_layout Description
2548 Article for basic articles
2551 \begin_layout Description
2552 Report for basic reports
2555 \begin_layout Description
2556 Book for writing a book
2559 \begin_layout Description
2560 Letter for US-style letters
2563 \begin_layout Standard
2564 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2565 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2566 will include many of these.
2567 Here are some of the classes.
2568 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2570 Special Document Classes
2579 \begin_layout Description
2580 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2583 \begin_layout Description
2584 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2588 \begin_layout Description
2589 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2593 \begin_layout Description
2594 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2595 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2596 There are three article layouts available.
2597 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2598 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2599 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2600 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2605 sequential numbering
2606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2609 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2610 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2611 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2612 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2615 \begin_layout Description
2616 Beamer Layout for presentations
2619 \begin_layout Description
2620 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2621 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2625 \begin_layout Description
2626 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2629 \begin_layout Description
2631 \begin_inset space ~
2634 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2637 \begin_layout Description
2638 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2641 \begin_layout Description
2642 Foils Used to make transparencies
2645 \begin_layout Description
2646 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2647 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2651 \begin_layout Description
2652 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2653 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2656 \begin_layout Description
2657 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2660 \begin_layout Description
2661 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2664 \begin_layout Description
2665 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2666 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2667 (Is used by this document.)
2670 \begin_layout Description
2671 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2674 \begin_layout Description
2675 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2678 \begin_layout Description
2683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2690 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2691 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2693 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2696 \begin_layout Description
2697 Slides Used to make transparencies
2700 \begin_layout Description
2702 \begin_inset space ~
2705 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2706 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2709 \begin_layout Description
2710 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2713 \begin_layout Standard
2714 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2716 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2722 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2723 of the document classes.
2726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2730 \begin_layout Standard
2731 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2733 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2734 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2736 \begin_inset Index idx
2739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2757 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2759 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2762 \begin_layout Standard
2764 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2765 and some of them, like
2769 , are highly specialized.
2770 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2771 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2773 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2774 by some document class.
2775 There are just too many of them.
2776 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2780 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2788 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2789 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2790 document class for a new file.
2791 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2796 Installing new LaTeX files
2797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2804 manual for information on how to install them.
2805 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2811 \begin_layout Standard
2812 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2813 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2815 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2816 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2817 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2819 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2822 \begin_inset space ~
2829 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2841 \begin_inset Index idx
2844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2853 \begin_layout Standard
2854 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2855 chosen document class.
2856 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2857 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2864 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2868 \begin_inset Index idx
2871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2878 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2882 \begin_layout Standard
2883 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2884 always installed by default.
2885 LyX will warn you if you do not have a needed package or converter, and
2886 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2887 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2888 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2889 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2890 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2891 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2894 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2898 \begin_inset Index idx
2901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2902 Reconfiguration of LyX
2908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2911 Installing new LaTeX files
2912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2919 manual for more information on installing needed packages.
2922 \begin_layout Standard
2923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2931 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2932 LyX will advise you about these things.
2940 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2944 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2949 \begin_inset Index idx
2952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2953 Document ! Local Layout
2961 \begin_layout Standard
2962 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2963 used in a variety of different documents.
2964 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2965 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2966 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2967 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2968 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2969 What you want is LyX's
2970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2986 manual for information on how to use it.
2989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2993 \begin_layout Standard
2994 Each class has a default set of options.
2995 Here's a quick table describing them:
2998 \begin_layout Standard
2999 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3005 \begin_layout Standard
3007 \begin_inset Tabular
3008 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3009 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3010 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3011 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3012 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3013 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3014 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3468 \begin_layout Standard
3469 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3475 \begin_layout Standard
3476 You're probably also wondering what
3477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3481 \begin_inset space ~
3485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3489 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3490 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3495 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3500 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3510 headings, there are also
3518 headings, and so on.
3519 We will describe these headings fully in section
3520 \begin_inset space ~
3524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3526 reference "sub:Headings"
3533 \begin_layout Subsection
3535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3537 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3542 \begin_inset Index idx
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3554 \begin_inset Index idx
3557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3566 \begin_layout Standard
3567 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3569 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3576 \begin_inset space ~
3584 \begin_inset space ~
3589 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3591 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3592 to use for your document.
3593 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3597 \begin_layout Standard
3604 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3610 \begin_inset space ~
3615 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3616 You can choose between the following five options:
3619 \begin_layout Labeling
3620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3625 Use default page style of current class.
3628 \begin_layout Labeling
3629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3634 No page numbers or headings.
3637 \begin_layout Labeling
3638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3646 \begin_layout Labeling
3647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3652 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3653 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3654 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3657 \begin_layout Labeling
3658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3663 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3664 have the LaTeX-package
3669 \begin_inset Index idx
3672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3673 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3679 How they are defined is explained in section
3680 \begin_inset space ~
3684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3686 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3693 \begin_layout Standard
3694 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3695 \begin_inset space ~
3699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3701 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3708 \begin_layout Subsection
3709 Paper Size and Orientation
3710 \begin_inset Index idx
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 Document ! Paper size
3720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3722 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3729 \begin_layout Standard
3730 You can find the following options in the menu
3733 \begin_inset space ~
3740 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3746 \begin_inset Index idx
3749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3758 \begin_layout Labeling
3759 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3763 \begin_inset space ~
3768 What size paper to print on.
3773 \begin_layout Itemize
3779 \begin_layout Itemize
3785 \begin_layout Itemize
3791 \begin_layout Itemize
3797 \begin_layout Itemize
3800 US letter, US legal, US executive
3803 \begin_layout Itemize
3809 \begin_layout Itemize
3816 \begin_layout Labeling
3817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3822 To choose whether to output as
3833 \begin_layout Labeling
3834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_inset space ~
3843 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3844 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3847 \begin_layout Subsection
3849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3856 \begin_inset Index idx
3859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_inset Index idx
3869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3878 \begin_layout Standard
3879 Paper margins are set in the menu
3881 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3885 \begin_inset Index idx
3888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3897 \begin_layout Standard
3898 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings.
3899 Because KOMA-Script calculates then the print space automatically by taking
3900 the paper format and the font size into account.
3903 \begin_layout Subsection
3907 \begin_layout Standard
3908 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3913 That includes the paragraph environments.
3914 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3915 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3916 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3917 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3926 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3928 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3929 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3930 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3933 \begin_layout Section
3934 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3939 Paragraph ! Indentation
3947 \begin_layout Subsection
3949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3951 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3958 \begin_layout Standard
3959 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3960 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3963 \begin_layout Standard
3964 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3965 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3966 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3967 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3971 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3977 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3978 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3979 language than English.
3980 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the used language.
3983 \begin_layout Standard
3984 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
3985 and text — in fact, all of the spacings for just about everything are pre-coded
3987 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
3988 LyX takes care of that.
3989 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
3991 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
3992 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
3993 of a page, and so on.
3997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3998 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4003 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4004 LyX gives you the ability to globally change
4008 of these pre-coded spacings.
4009 We will explain more later.
4012 \begin_layout Subsection
4013 Paragraph Separation
4014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4016 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4021 \begin_inset Index idx
4024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4025 Paragraph ! Separation
4033 \begin_layout Standard
4034 To separate paragraphs, select
4045 \begin_inset space ~
4052 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4065 to indent paragraphs or add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4068 \begin_layout Subsection
4072 \begin_layout Standard
4073 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4076 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4078 \begin_inset space ~
4083 dialog and toggle the
4086 \begin_inset space ~
4091 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4094 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4098 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4099 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4103 \begin_layout Standard
4104 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4105 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4108 \begin_layout Subsection
4110 \begin_inset Index idx
4113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4114 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4122 \begin_layout Standard
4125 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4129 \begin_inset Index idx
4132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 dialog you can set the line spacing in the submenu
4144 \begin_inset space ~
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4154 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4159 \begin_inset Index idx
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4163 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4168 installed to use this feature.
4176 \begin_layout Section
4177 Paragraph Environments
4178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4180 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4185 \begin_inset Index idx
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 Paragraph ! Environments
4195 \begin_inset Index idx
4198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4199 Paragraph environments|(
4207 \begin_layout Subsection
4211 \begin_layout Standard
4212 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4215 \begin_layout Standard
4234 \begin_inset Newline newline
4237 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4238 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4239 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4248 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4251 \begin_layout Standard
4252 A paragraph environment is simply a
4253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4260 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4261 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4262 scheme, labels, and so on.
4263 Additionally, you can
4264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4271 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4272 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4273 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4274 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hold-overs from the
4275 days of typewriters.
4276 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4278 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4283 \begin_inset Graphics
4284 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4290 at the left end of the toolbar.
4291 LyX will change the environment of the
4295 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4296 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4297 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4301 \begin_layout Standard
4310 create a new paragraph using the
4314 paragraph environment.
4316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4323 because if you are in one of these environments:
4326 \begin_layout Itemize
4332 \begin_layout Itemize
4338 \begin_layout Itemize
4344 \begin_layout Itemize
4350 \begin_layout Itemize
4356 \begin_layout Itemize
4362 \begin_layout Itemize
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you hit
4373 , rather than resetting it to
4378 LyX will still reset the nesting depth, however.
4379 Usually, starting a new paragraph resets both the paragraph environment
4380 and the nesting depth (for more on nesting see section
4381 \begin_inset space ~
4385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4387 reference "sec:Nesting"
4392 At the moment, all this is context-specific; you're better off expecting
4397 to reset the paragraph environment and depth.
4398 If you want a new paragraph to keep the current environment and depth,
4402 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
4408 \begin_layout Subsection
4412 \begin_layout Standard
4413 The default paragraph environment is
4418 It creates a plain paragraph.
4419 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4420 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4421 this manual) are in the
4428 \begin_layout Standard
4429 You can nest a paragraph using the
4433 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4441 \begin_layout Subsection
4443 \begin_inset Index idx
4446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4455 \begin_layout Standard
4456 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4465 for thanks or contact information.
4466 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4467 page along with today's date.
4468 For other types of documents, the title
4469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4476 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4480 \begin_layout Standard
4481 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4495 Here's how you use them:
4498 \begin_layout Itemize
4499 Put the title of your document in the
4506 \begin_layout Itemize
4507 Put the author name in the
4514 \begin_layout Itemize
4515 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4516 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4522 Note that using this environment is optional.
4523 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4524 If you don't want any date, add the line
4525 \begin_inset Newline newline
4535 \begin_inset Newline newline
4538 to the preamble of your document (menu
4540 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4546 \begin_layout Standard
4547 You can use footnotes to insert
4548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4555 or contact information.
4558 \begin_layout Subsection
4560 \begin_inset Index idx
4563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4579 \begin_layout Standard
4580 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4581 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4586 \begin_inset Index idx
4589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4590 Section headings ! Numbered
4598 \begin_layout Standard
4599 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4603 \begin_layout Enumerate
4609 \begin_layout Enumerate
4615 \begin_layout Enumerate
4621 \begin_layout Enumerate
4627 \begin_layout Enumerate
4633 \begin_layout Enumerate
4639 \begin_layout Enumerate
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4647 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4648 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4651 \begin_layout Standard
4652 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4653 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4654 You group the book into chapters.
4655 LyX does similar grouping:
4658 \begin_layout Itemize
4663 is divided into either
4674 \begin_layout Itemize
4686 \begin_layout Itemize
4698 \begin_layout Itemize
4710 \begin_layout Itemize
4722 \begin_layout Itemize
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4743 Not all document types use the
4747 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4752 is the top-level heading.
4760 \begin_layout Standard
4765 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4766 along with the number of the subsection, section, and, if applicable, chapter
4768 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4782 \begin_inset Index idx
4785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4786 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4794 \begin_layout Standard
4795 The unnumbered section headings have a
4796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4803 at the end of their name.
4804 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4805 the table of contents, see section
4806 \begin_inset space ~
4810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4820 Changing the Numbering
4821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4823 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4832 in the Table of Contents.
4833 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4835 Certain classes start with
4849 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4859 This is something you can change.
4862 \begin_layout Standard
4865 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4869 \begin_inset Index idx
4872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4881 \begin_inset space ~
4885 \begin_inset space ~
4890 you will see two counters.
4895 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4897 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4902 Short Titles of Headings
4903 \begin_inset Index idx
4906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4907 Section headings ! Short titles
4913 \begin_inset Argument
4916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4925 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4932 \begin_layout Standard
4933 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4934 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4935 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4936 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4939 \begin_layout Standard
4940 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4941 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4942 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4943 To specify a short title, use the menu
4945 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4947 \begin_inset space ~
4953 This will insert a box labeled
4954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4969 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
4970 This also works for captions inside floats.
4973 \begin_layout Standard
4974 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
4977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 The following information applies to all section headings:
4985 \begin_layout Itemize
4986 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
4989 \begin_layout Itemize
4990 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
4993 \begin_layout Itemize
4994 You can only use inline math in these environments.
4997 \begin_layout Itemize
4998 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5001 \begin_layout Subsection
5002 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5005 \begin_layout Standard
5006 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5020 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5021 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5022 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5023 the text they contain.
5024 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5032 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5035 \begin_layout Standard
5036 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5045 when you start a new paragraph.
5046 So, you can type in that poem and merrily hit
5050 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5051 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5052 have to change back to the
5056 environment yourself.
5065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5072 \begin_inset Index idx
5075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5084 \begin_layout Standard
5085 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5086 time for the differences.
5095 are identical except for one difference:
5099 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5108 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5111 \begin_layout Standard
5112 Here's an example of the
5125 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5127 See – no indentation!
5131 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5132 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5133 the other paragraph.
5136 \begin_layout Standard
5137 Here's another example, this time in the
5144 \begin_layout Quotation
5150 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5151 If your country uses a writing style that shows off new paragraphs by indenting
5152 the first line, then
5156 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5160 you were quoting other text.
5163 \begin_layout Quotation
5164 Here's a new paragraph.
5165 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5166 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5169 \begin_layout Standard
5170 As the examples show,
5174 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5175 They should put quotes in the
5180 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5184 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5193 \begin_inset Index idx
5196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5205 \begin_inset Index idx
5208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5224 \begin_layout Standard
5229 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5235 \begin_inset Newline newline
5238 Which I did not rehearse!
5242 It could be much worse.
5243 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5245 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5246 indented a bit more than the first.
5247 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5253 \begin_inset Newline newline
5256 And make things look fine
5257 \begin_inset Newline newline
5263 arg "newline-insert newline"
5269 \begin_layout Standard
5274 does not indent both margins.
5275 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5276 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5283 arg "newline-insert newline"
5289 \begin_layout Subsection
5291 \begin_inset Index idx
5294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5310 \begin_layout Standard
5311 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5321 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5330 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5331 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5332 describing some general features of all four of them.
5335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5339 \begin_layout Standard
5340 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5342 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5351 reset the environment to
5355 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5356 The nesting depth is hereby kept.
5357 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5361 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5364 to break paragraphs.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5368 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5369 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5371 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5372 you read all of section
5373 \begin_inset space ~
5377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5379 reference "sec:Nesting"
5387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5393 \begin_inset Index idx
5396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5412 \begin_layout Standard
5413 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5417 paragraph environment.
5418 It has the following properties:
5421 \begin_layout Itemize
5422 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5426 \begin_layout Itemize
5427 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5430 \begin_layout Itemize
5431 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5435 \begin_layout Itemize
5436 The items can have any length.
5437 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5438 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5445 \begin_layout Itemize
5450 environment inside another
5454 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5458 \begin_layout Itemize
5459 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5462 \begin_layout Itemize
5463 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5466 \begin_layout Itemize
5468 \begin_inset space ~
5472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5474 reference "sec:Nesting"
5478 for a full explanation of nesting.
5482 \begin_layout Standard
5483 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5492 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5495 \begin_layout Standard
5496 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5497 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5500 \begin_layout Itemize
5501 The label for the first level
5505 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5509 \begin_layout Itemize
5510 The label for the second level is a dash.
5514 \begin_layout Itemize
5515 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5519 \begin_layout Itemize
5520 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5524 \begin_layout Itemize
5525 Back out to the third level.
5529 \begin_layout Itemize
5530 Back to the second level.
5534 \begin_layout Itemize
5535 Back to the outermost level.
5538 \begin_layout Standard
5539 These are the default labels for an
5544 You can customize these labels in the
5546 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5549 dialog in the submenu
5556 \begin_inset Index idx
5559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5568 \begin_layout Standard
5569 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5570 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5572 \begin_inset space ~
5576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5578 reference "sec:Nesting"
5585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5603 name "sec:Enumerate"
5610 \begin_layout Standard
5615 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5616 It has these properties:
5619 \begin_layout Enumerate
5620 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5624 \begin_layout Enumerate
5625 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5629 \begin_layout Enumerate
5630 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5633 \begin_layout Enumerate
5638 environment resets the counter to one.
5641 \begin_layout Enumerate
5654 \begin_layout Enumerate
5655 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5656 Items can have any length.
5659 \begin_layout Enumerate
5660 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5663 \begin_layout Enumerate
5664 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5667 \begin_layout Enumerate
5668 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5672 \begin_layout Standard
5681 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5682 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5689 \begin_layout Enumerate
5690 The first level of an
5694 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5698 \begin_layout Enumerate
5699 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5703 \begin_layout Enumerate
5704 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5708 \begin_layout Enumerate
5709 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5712 \begin_layout Enumerate
5713 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5718 \begin_layout Enumerate
5719 Back to the third level
5723 \begin_layout Enumerate
5724 Back to the second level.
5728 \begin_layout Enumerate
5729 Back to the outermost level.
5732 \begin_layout Standard
5733 Once again, you can customize the type of numbering used in the
5738 It involves adding commands to the LaTeX preamble (see the
5743 As stated earlier, such customization only shows up in the printed version,
5747 \begin_layout Standard
5748 There is more to nesting
5752 environments than we've stated here.
5753 You should read section
5754 \begin_inset space ~
5758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5760 reference "sec:Nesting"
5764 to learn more about nesting.
5767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5773 \begin_inset Index idx
5776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5790 list has no fixed label.
5791 Instead, LyX uses the first
5792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5799 of the first line as the label.
5803 \begin_layout Description
5804 Example: This is an example of the
5811 \begin_layout Standard
5812 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5816 \begin_layout Standard
5818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5825 it is meant that the first hit of the
5829 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5831 If you need to use more than one word in the label use a
5839 arg "space-insert protected"
5844 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5845 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5847 \begin_inset space ~
5853 \begin_inset space ~
5857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5859 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5863 for more info.) Here is an example:
5866 \begin_layout Description
5868 \begin_inset space ~
5871 Example: This one shows how to use a
5874 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_layout Description
5887 Usage: You should use the
5891 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5892 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5894 It's not a good idea to use a
5898 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5899 You're better off using
5911 paragraphs into them.
5914 \begin_layout Description
5915 Nesting: You can nest
5919 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5924 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5925 them from the first line.
5928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5934 \begin_inset Index idx
5937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5946 \begin_layout Standard
5951 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5954 \begin_layout Standard
5955 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 When you are using a KOMA-Script document class, like in this document,
5968 environment is named
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5989 environment has user-defined labels for each list item.
5990 There are the following properties of this list environment:
5993 \begin_layout Labeling
5994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5996 \begin_inset space ~
5999 labels LyX uses the first
6000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6007 of each line as the item label.
6012 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6013 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6014 blank as described above.
6017 \begin_layout Labeling
6018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6019 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6020 the body of the item text.
6021 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6022 label width plus a little extra space.
6026 \begin_layout Labeling
6027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6029 \begin_inset space ~
6032 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6034 If the label width is larger, the label
6035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6042 into the first line.
6043 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6044 margin of the rest of the item text.
6047 \begin_layout Labeling
6048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6050 \begin_inset space ~
6053 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6058 environment has the same left margin.
6059 \begin_inset Newline newline
6062 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6065 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6067 \begin_inset space ~
6076 \begin_inset space ~
6081 determines the default label width.
6082 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6091 multiple times instead.
6092 The M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6101 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6104 \begin_inset space ~
6109 every time you alter a label in a
6114 \begin_inset Newline newline
6117 The predefined default width is the length of
6118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6126 \begin_inset space ~
6131 \begin_inset Newline newline
6135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6143 Setting the cursor into a list item to change only its label width will
6144 only change the width inside LyX but not in the output.
6152 \begin_layout Standard
6157 environment the same way as the
6161 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6167 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6171 \begin_layout Standard
6176 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6178 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6180 \begin_inset space ~
6184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6186 reference "sec:Nesting"
6190 to learn about nesting.
6193 \begin_layout Standard
6194 There is yet another feature of the
6198 environment: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item
6200 You can use additional
6204 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6209 are documented in section
6210 \begin_inset space ~
6214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6216 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6221 Here are some examples:
6224 \begin_layout Labeling
6225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6226 Left The default for
6233 \begin_layout Labeling
6234 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6235 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6242 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6245 \begin_layout Labeling
6246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6247 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6258 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6261 \begin_layout Subsection
6263 \begin_inset Index idx
6266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6275 \begin_layout Standard
6276 To use the features described in this section, you must load the module
6279 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6281 in the document settings.
6282 This loads the features of the LaTeX-package
6287 \begin_inset Index idx
6290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6291 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6300 Custom Enumerate Lists
6301 \begin_inset Index idx
6304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6305 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6313 \begin_layout Standard
6315 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6318 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6321 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6322 There you add the command
6325 \begin_layout Standard
6333 \begin_layout Standard
6334 in TeX Code (shortcut
6344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6346 \begin_inset space ~
6350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6352 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6365 is hereby the counter of the enumeration in the first level.
6372 outputs the counter as small Roman numeral.
6373 For capital Roman numerals replace in the command above
6386 For Arabic numerals use
6394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6401 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6416 \begin_layout Standard
6418 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6426 You can only number 26
6427 \begin_inset space ~
6430 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6438 \begin_layout Standard
6439 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6440 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6443 \begin_layout Standard
6444 As example a list with custom numbering:
6447 \begin_layout Enumerate
6448 \begin_inset Argument
6451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6477 \begin_layout Enumerate
6478 \begin_inset Argument
6481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6504 \begin_layout Enumerate
6509 \begin_layout Enumerate
6510 \begin_inset Argument
6513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6537 \begin_layout Enumerate
6538 \begin_inset Argument
6541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 \begin_layout Standard
6568 For this list these commands were used:
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6582 \begin_inset Newline newline
6590 \begin_inset Newline newline
6598 \begin_inset Newline newline
6608 \begin_layout Standard
6615 makes the label emphasized and
6624 \begin_layout Standard
6625 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6633 When you changed the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6634 lists until you change the definition.
6642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6644 \begin_inset Index idx
6647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6656 \begin_layout Standard
6657 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6660 \begin_layout Enumerate
6661 \begin_inset Argument
6664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6683 \begin_inset Note Note
6686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 goes back to default numbering
6695 \begin_layout Enumerate
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6703 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6707 \begin_layout Standard
6708 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6713 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6714 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6717 \begin_layout Standard
6718 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6726 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6734 \begin_layout Standard
6735 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number than the
6737 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6738 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6739 of a normal enumeration.
6740 There, insert the command
6743 \begin_layout Standard
6749 \begin_layout Standard
6754 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6758 \begin_layout Enumerate
6762 \begin_layout Enumerate
6766 \begin_layout Standard
6767 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6770 \begin_layout Enumerate
6771 \begin_inset Argument
6774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6790 This enumeration starts at 4
6793 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6795 \begin_inset Index idx
6798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6808 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6810 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6813 \begin_layout Itemize
6817 \begin_layout Itemize
6818 with standard spacing
6821 \begin_layout Standard
6822 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6824 Add there the command
6828 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6831 \begin_layout Itemize
6832 \begin_inset Argument
6835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 \begin_layout Itemize
6858 \begin_layout Itemize
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6869 \begin_inset Index idx
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6873 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6879 For more info see its documentation,
6880 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6889 \begin_layout Standard
6890 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6892 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6893 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6897 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6912 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate
6926 with negative indentation
6929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6930 Further Customization
6931 \begin_inset Index idx
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 Lists ! Customization
6943 \begin_layout Standard
6944 You can also change the style of description lists.
6948 \begin_layout Standard
6954 \begin_layout Standard
6955 changes the description label font, the command
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6964 \begin_layout Standard
6965 sets the list style.
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6969 An example where the command
6972 \begin_layout Standard
6977 itshape, style=nextline
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6984 \begin_layout Description
6986 \begin_inset space ~
6990 \begin_inset Argument
6993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7001 itshape, style=nextline
7011 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7012 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7016 \begin_layout Description
7018 \begin_inset space ~
7021 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7022 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7023 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7026 \begin_layout Standard
7027 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7033 \begin_inset Index idx
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7043 For more info see its documentation,
7044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7053 \begin_layout Subsection
7055 \begin_inset Index idx
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7067 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7075 \begin_inset space ~
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7084 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7092 \begin_inset space ~
7098 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7099 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7100 In contrast, you can use the
7107 \begin_inset space ~
7112 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7113 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 Of course, you're not limited to using
7125 \begin_inset space ~
7134 \begin_inset space ~
7139 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7140 some European academic papers.
7143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7147 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7154 \begin_layout Standard
7159 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7160 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7164 \begin_inset space ~
7169 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7170 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7171 Here's an example of each:
7174 \begin_layout Right Address
7176 \begin_inset Newline newline
7180 \begin_inset Newline newline
7184 \begin_inset Newline newline
7187 When is it? What is today?
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7194 \begin_inset space ~
7200 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7201 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7202 Here's an example of the
7209 \begin_layout Address
7211 \begin_inset Newline newline
7214 Where do I send this
7215 \begin_inset Newline newline
7218 Your post office and country
7221 \begin_layout Standard
7222 As you can see, both
7229 \begin_inset space ~
7234 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7239 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7245 This makes sense, since
7253 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7254 Thus, you have to use
7261 arg "newline-insert newline"
7267 \begin_inset space ~
7270 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7272 \begin_inset space ~
7281 menu) to start a new line in an
7288 \begin_inset space ~
7296 \begin_layout Subsection
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7301 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7302 or list of references.
7303 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7310 \begin_inset Index idx
7313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7322 \begin_layout Standard
7327 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7328 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7329 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7330 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7334 in anything else or vice versa.
7340 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7341 The book document classes ignores the
7345 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7349 in a letter document class.
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7357 environment does several things for you.
7358 First, it puts the centered label
7359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7367 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7369 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7370 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7371 the subsequent text.
7372 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7373 The appearance in the output depends on the used article or report class.
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7377 Starting a new paragraph by hitting
7381 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7382 The new paragraph will still be in the
7387 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7388 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7391 \begin_layout Standard
7392 \begin_inset Float figure
7397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7399 \begin_inset Graphics
7400 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7408 \begin_inset Caption
7410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7413 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7434 \begin_layout Standard
7435 We'd love to give you directly an example of the
7439 environment, but since this document is in the
7440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7447 class, we can't do this.
7448 We inserted it therefore as figure
7449 \begin_inset space ~
7453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7455 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7460 If you've never heard of an
7461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7468 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7471 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7477 \begin_inset Index idx
7480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7489 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7496 \begin_layout Standard
7501 environment is used to list references.
7502 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7503 only use it at the end of the document.
7508 in anything else or vice versa will not work.
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 When you first open a
7516 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7532 depending on the document class.
7533 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7534 Each paragraph of the
7538 environment is a bibliography entry.
7543 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7544 Each new paragraph is still in the
7551 \begin_layout Standard
7552 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7553 by using a BibTeX database.
7554 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7555 phy handling, have a look at section
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7562 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7569 \begin_layout Subsection
7573 \begin_inset Index idx
7576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7577 Paragraph ! LyX code
7583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7592 \begin_layout Standard
7597 environment is another LyX extension.
7598 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7603 key as a fixed whitespace;
7607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7619 \begin_inset space ~
7624 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7629 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7630 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7633 arg "newline-insert newline"
7650 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7651 So, when you finish using the
7655 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7656 Also, you can nest the
7660 environment inside of others.
7663 \begin_layout Standard
7664 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7667 \begin_layout Itemize
7671 arg "newline-insert newline"
7674 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7679 \begin_inset space \space{}
7689 arg "newline-insert newline"
7695 \begin_layout Itemize
7699 arg "newline-insert newline"
7710 \begin_layout Itemize
7715 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7722 \begin_layout Itemize
7726 arg "space-insert protected"
7733 \begin_layout Itemize
7734 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7735 You must put at least one
7739 in any line you want blank.
7740 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7743 \begin_layout Itemize
7744 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7748 since that will insert
7753 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7756 arg "self-insert \""
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7766 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7770 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7774 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7778 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7782 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7783 printf("Hello World!
7788 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7792 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7796 \begin_layout Standard
7797 This is just the standard
7798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7809 \begin_layout Standard
7814 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7815 rc-files, and so on.
7816 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7817 as if you used a typewriter.
7818 \begin_inset Index idx
7821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7822 Paragraph environments|)
7827 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7830 Program Code Listings
7835 \begin_inset space ~
7843 \begin_layout Section
7844 Nesting Environments
7845 \begin_inset Index idx
7848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7849 Nesting ! Environments
7855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7864 \begin_layout Subsection
7868 \begin_layout Standard
7869 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7871 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7873 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7875 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7887 \begin_layout Enumerate
7891 \begin_layout Enumerate
7896 \begin_layout Enumerate
7900 \begin_layout Enumerate
7905 \begin_layout Enumerate
7909 \begin_layout Standard
7910 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7911 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7914 \begin_inset space ~
7918 \begin_inset space ~
7926 \begin_inset space ~
7930 \begin_inset space ~
7939 menu to change the nesting depth of the current paragraph (the status bar
7940 will tell you how far you are nested).
7941 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7944 arg "depth-increment"
7950 arg "depth-decrement"
7953 or the convenient key bindings
7964 arg "depth-increment"
7970 arg "depth-decrement"
7973 to change the nesting level.
7974 The change will work on the current selection if you have made one (allowing
7975 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7981 If it's invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7982 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7983 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7986 \begin_layout Standard
7987 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7988 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7990 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7993 \begin_layout Subsection
7994 What You Can and Can't Nest
7997 \begin_layout Standard
7998 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
7999 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8002 \begin_layout Standard
8003 The question if nesting a paragraph environment is possible, is a bit more
8004 complicated than a simple yes or no.
8005 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8008 \begin_layout Itemize
8009 Completely unnestable
8012 \begin_layout Itemize
8013 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8017 \begin_layout Itemize
8018 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8022 \begin_layout Standard
8023 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8024 environments have them:
8027 \begin_layout Description
8028 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8029 Can't nest into them.
8033 \begin_layout Itemize
8039 \begin_layout Itemize
8045 \begin_layout Itemize
8051 \begin_layout Itemize
8057 \begin_layout Itemize
8064 \begin_layout Description
8066 \begin_inset space ~
8069 Nestable You can nest them.
8070 You can nest other things into them.
8074 \begin_layout Itemize
8080 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 \begin_layout Itemize
8092 \begin_layout Itemize
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 \begin_layout Itemize
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8116 \begin_layout Itemize
8123 \begin_layout Description
8124 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8125 You can't nest anything into them.
8129 \begin_layout Itemize
8135 \begin_layout Itemize
8141 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 \begin_layout Itemize
8165 \begin_layout Itemize
8171 \begin_layout Itemize
8177 \begin_layout Itemize
8183 \begin_layout Itemize
8189 \begin_layout Itemize
8195 \begin_layout Itemize
8201 \begin_layout Itemize
8207 \begin_layout Itemize
8211 \begin_inset space ~
8217 \begin_layout Itemize
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8225 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8233 Although it is possible to nest numbered section headings like
8242 \begin_inset space ~
8246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8250 \begin_inset space \space{}
8253 lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create
8254 well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested
8255 section headings violate this.
8263 \begin_layout Subsection
8264 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8265 \begin_inset Index idx
8268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8269 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8277 \begin_layout Standard
8278 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8279 affected by nesting anyhow.
8283 \begin_layout Itemize
8287 \begin_layout Itemize
8291 \begin_layout Itemize
8295 \begin_layout Standard
8297 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8305 Figures and tables in
8309 are not affected by this.
8314 Have a look at section
8315 \begin_inset space ~
8319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8321 reference "sec:Floats"
8325 for more information about
8332 \begin_layout Standard
8333 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8334 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8338 \begin_layout Standard
8339 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8347 of its own, it behaves just like a
8348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8355 paragraph environment.
8356 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8360 \begin_layout Standard
8361 Here's an example with a table:
8364 \begin_layout Enumerate
8369 \begin_layout Enumerate
8370 This is (a) and it's nested.
8374 \begin_layout Standard
8375 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8381 \begin_layout Standard
8383 \begin_inset Tabular
8384 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8385 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8471 \begin_layout Standard
8472 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8479 \begin_layout Enumerate
8481 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8485 \begin_layout Enumerate
8489 \begin_layout Standard
8490 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8493 \begin_layout Enumerate
8498 \begin_layout Enumerate
8499 This is (a) and it's nested.
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8512 \begin_inset Tabular
8513 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8514 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8515 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8516 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8600 \begin_layout Standard
8601 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8607 \begin_layout Enumerate
8614 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8617 \begin_layout Enumerate
8621 \begin_layout Standard
8622 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8626 \begin_layout Standard
8627 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8629 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8632 \begin_layout Enumerate
8637 \begin_layout Enumerate
8638 This is (a) and it's nested.
8641 \begin_layout Standard
8642 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8648 \begin_layout Standard
8650 \begin_inset Tabular
8651 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8652 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8653 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8654 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8739 \begin_layout Standard
8740 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8746 \begin_layout Enumerate
8748 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8755 \begin_layout Enumerate
8759 \begin_layout Standard
8760 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8766 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8767 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8771 \begin_layout Subsection
8772 Usage and General Features
8775 \begin_layout Standard
8776 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8785 is the innermost possible depth.
8786 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8789 \begin_layout Enumerate
8790 level #1 – outermost
8794 \begin_layout Enumerate
8799 \begin_layout Enumerate
8804 \begin_layout Enumerate
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8814 \begin_layout Itemize
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8824 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8825 both of them in the example.
8826 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8836 For example, if we tried to nest another
8841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8848 , we would get errors.
8851 \begin_layout Subsection
8853 \begin_inset Index idx
8856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8865 \begin_layout Standard
8866 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8867 We have several examples of nested environments.
8868 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8873 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8876 \begin_layout Labeling
8877 \labelwidthstring MMM
8878 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8887 \begin_layout Labeling
8888 \labelwidthstring MMM
8889 #2-a This is level #2.
8890 We created it by using
8893 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8899 arg "depth-increment"
8906 \begin_layout Labeling
8907 \labelwidthstring MMM
8908 #3-a This is level #3.
8909 This time, we just hit
8916 arg "depth-increment"
8920 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8924 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8930 arg "depth-increment"
8937 \begin_layout Standard
8942 environment, nested inside of
8943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8951 So, it's at level #4.
8952 We did this by hitting
8955 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8961 arg "depth-increment"
8964 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8969 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8985 \begin_layout Standard
8990 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8993 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8999 \begin_layout Labeling
9000 \labelwidthstring MMM
9001 #4-a This is level #4.
9005 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9008 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9013 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9017 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9022 keep nesting things inside
9023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9034 \begin_layout Labeling
9035 \labelwidthstring MMM
9036 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9041 \begin_layout Labeling
9042 \labelwidthstring MMM
9043 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9044 and this is level #6.
9045 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9049 \begin_layout Labeling
9050 \labelwidthstring MMM
9051 #5-b Back to level #5.
9055 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9061 arg "depth-decrement"
9068 \begin_layout Labeling
9069 \labelwidthstring MMM
9073 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9079 arg "depth-decrement"
9082 , we're back at level #4.
9086 \begin_layout Labeling
9087 \labelwidthstring MMM
9088 #3-b Back to level #3.
9089 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9093 \begin_layout Labeling
9094 \labelwidthstring MMM
9095 #2-b Back to level #2.
9100 \begin_layout Labeling
9101 \labelwidthstring MMM
9102 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9103 After this sentence, we will hit
9107 and change the paragraph environment back to
9114 \begin_layout Standard
9115 We could have also used the
9131 environment in place of the
9136 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9140 Example 2: Inheritance
9143 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9144 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9147 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9156 arg "depth-increment"
9159 , after which, we will change to the
9167 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 environment, at level #2.
9175 \begin_layout Enumerate
9176 Notice how the nested
9180 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9184 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9188 \begin_layout Standard
9189 We ended this example by hitting
9194 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9198 and reset the nesting depth by using
9201 arg "depth-decrement"
9207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9208 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9217 \begin_inset Argument
9220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9221 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9229 \begin_layout Enumerate
9230 This is level #1, in an
9234 paragraph environment.
9235 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9239 \begin_layout Enumerate
9244 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9250 arg "depth-increment"
9254 Now, what happens if we nest an
9258 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9259 label be? An asterisk?
9263 \begin_layout Itemize
9273 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9274 So, its label is a bullet.
9275 (We got here by using
9278 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9284 arg "depth-increment"
9287 , then changing the environment to
9295 \begin_layout Itemize
9296 Here's level #4, produced using
9299 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9305 arg "depth-increment"
9309 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9314 \begin_layout Enumerate
9315 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9317 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9322 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9326 , because we are in the
9335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
9359 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9360 type of numbering does LyX use?
9363 \begin_layout Enumerate
9364 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9367 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9370 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9373 \begin_layout Enumerate
9377 arg "depth-decrement"
9380 to decrease the depth after the next
9383 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9390 \begin_layout Enumerate
9392 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9396 \begin_layout Enumerate
9398 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9399 numeral as the label.Why?
9402 \begin_layout Enumerate
9403 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9412 Notice, however, that LyX
9416 reset the counter for the label.
9420 \begin_layout Enumerate
9424 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9430 arg "depth-decrement"
9433 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9434 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9435 into the twofold-nested
9443 \begin_layout Enumerate
9444 The same thing happens if we do another
9447 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9453 arg "depth-decrement"
9456 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9459 \begin_layout Standard
9460 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9465 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9479 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9485 The same rule applies for the
9489 environment, as well.
9492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9493 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9496 \begin_layout Enumerate
9497 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9498 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9499 the same detail with how we did it.
9508 \begin_layout Standard
9516 arg "depth-increment"
9523 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9524 the example in parentheses someplace.
9525 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9526 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9527 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9531 \begin_layout Enumerate
9536 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9541 Now we will add verse.
9542 \begin_inset Newline newline
9545 It will get much worse.
9546 \begin_inset Newline newline
9556 arg "depth-increment"
9567 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9568 \begin_inset Newline newline
9571 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9572 \begin_inset Newline newline
9578 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9591 \begin_layout Standard
9592 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9598 \begin_layout Standard
9600 \begin_inset Tabular
9601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9602 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9693 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9703 arg "depth-increment"
9709 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9719 arg "depth-decrement"
9726 \begin_layout Enumerate
9731 : level #1) This is another item.
9732 Note that selecting a
9736 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9737 3 times to put the table inside the
9745 \begin_layout Quotation
9746 We're now ending the
9750 list and changing to
9755 We're still at level #1.
9756 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9757 The next set of paragraphs is a
9758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9765 We will nest both the
9772 \begin_inset space ~
9777 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9781 for the letter body.
9785 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9788 to preserve the depth.
9789 Remember that you need to use
9792 arg "newline-insert newline"
9795 to create multiple lines inside the
9802 \begin_inset space ~
9812 \begin_layout Right Address
9814 \begin_inset Newline newline
9817 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9818 \begin_inset Newline newline
9824 \begin_layout Address
9826 \begin_inset space ~
9832 \begin_layout Quotation
9833 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9837 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9838 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9839 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9840 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9841 as soon as possible.
9842 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9845 \begin_layout Quotation
9846 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9847 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9848 with your order, along with payment.
9851 \begin_layout Quotation
9852 We thank you again for your patience.
9855 \begin_layout Address
9857 \begin_inset Newline newline
9864 \begin_layout Quotation
9865 That ends that example!
9868 \begin_layout Standard
9869 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9870 just a few keystrokes.
9871 We could have easily nested an
9892 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9895 \begin_layout Section
9896 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9897 \begin_inset Index idx
9900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9909 \begin_layout Standard
9910 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9911 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9912 you more spaces: Spaces of different width and spaces which can or cannot
9913 be broken at the end of a line.
9914 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9918 \begin_layout Subsection
9920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9922 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9927 \begin_inset Index idx
9930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9939 \begin_layout Standard
9940 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9942 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9946 Further documentation is given in section
9947 \begin_inset Newline newline
9951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9953 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9961 \begin_layout Standard
9962 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9977 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9986 A protected space is set with
9988 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9989 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9993 \begin_inset space ~
10003 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
10009 \begin_layout Subsection
10011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10013 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10018 \begin_inset Index idx
10021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10022 Spacing ! Horizontal
10030 \begin_layout Standard
10031 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10033 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10034 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10038 The length units are listed in Appendix
10039 \begin_inset space ~
10043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10045 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10056 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10061 \begin_inset Index idx
10064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10065 Spaces ! Inter-word
10073 \begin_layout Standard
10075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10079 \begin_inset space \space{}
10082 English) have the typographical convention to add extra space after an end-of-se
10083 ntence punctuation mark, and LyX honors those conventions (see section
10084 \begin_inset space ~
10088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10090 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10095 Sometimes, you want a normal space nevertheless.
10096 In this case, insert an inter-word space (shortcut
10099 arg "space-insert normal"
10105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10109 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10114 \begin_inset Index idx
10117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10126 \begin_layout Standard
10128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10135 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10144 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10145 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance
10146 inside abbreviations:
10149 \begin_layout Quote
10151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10155 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10158 \begin_layout Standard
10159 or between values and units.
10160 Compare for example this:
10161 \begin_inset Newline newline
10165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10169 \begin_inset Newline newline
10172 10 kg (normal space
10175 \begin_layout Standard
10176 You can insert thin spaces also with the menu
10178 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10179 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10181 \begin_inset space ~
10189 arg "space-insert thin"
10195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10199 \begin_layout Standard
10200 You can furthermore insert the following space types:
10203 \begin_layout Description
10205 \begin_inset space ~
10209 \begin_inset space ~
10212 space A line with a
10213 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10217 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10221 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10224 Negative thin space between the arrows.
10227 \begin_layout Description
10229 \begin_inset space ~
10233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10237 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10241 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10245 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10249 \begin_inset space ~
10253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10256 em) space between the arrows.
10259 \begin_layout Description
10261 \begin_inset space ~
10265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10269 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10273 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10277 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10281 \begin_inset space ~
10285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10288 em) space between the arrows.
10291 \begin_layout Description
10293 \begin_inset space ~
10297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10301 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10305 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10309 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10313 \begin_inset space ~
10317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10320 em) space between the arrows.
10323 \begin_layout Description
10325 \begin_inset space ~
10329 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10333 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10338 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10345 cm space between the arrows.
10348 \begin_layout Standard
10350 \begin_inset space ~
10354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10356 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10360 lists the different space sizes.
10363 \begin_layout Standard
10364 \begin_inset Float table
10369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10371 \begin_inset Caption
10373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10376 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10380 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10390 \begin_inset Tabular
10391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10392 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10617 \begin_inset Index idx
10620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10629 \begin_layout Standard
10630 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10631 in a uniform fashion.
10632 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10633 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10634 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10635 equally between themselves.
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10639 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10642 \begin_layout Quote
10644 This is on the left side
10645 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10648 This is on the right
10651 \begin_layout Quote
10654 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10658 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10664 \begin_layout Quote
10667 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10671 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10675 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10681 \begin_layout Standard
10682 That was an example in the
10688 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10692 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10696 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10699 is one in a standard paragraph.
10700 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10704 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10707 \begin_layout Standard
10708 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10711 \begin_inset space ~
10716 in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10719 \begin_layout Standard
10721 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10725 \begin_inset space ~
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10733 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10737 \begin_inset space ~
10743 \begin_layout Standard
10745 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10749 \begin_inset space ~
10755 \begin_layout Standard
10757 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10761 \begin_inset space ~
10767 \begin_layout Standard
10769 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10779 \begin_layout Standard
10781 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10785 \begin_inset space ~
10791 \begin_layout Standard
10792 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10800 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10804 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10805 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10806 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10810 option in the space dialog.
10818 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10822 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10827 \begin_inset Index idx
10830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10846 \begin_inset space \space{}
10849 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10856 What is correct English?:
10857 \begin_inset Newline newline
10861 \begin_inset Newline newline
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10868 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10869 \begin_inset Newline newline
10873 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10884 \begin_inset Newline newline
10888 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10899 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10905 \begin_layout Standard
10906 So that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10923 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10925 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10926 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10930 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10940 \begin_inset space ~
10944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10947 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10956 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10957 That is why it is named
10958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10966 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10967 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10971 \begin_layout Subsection
10973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10975 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10980 \begin_inset Index idx
10983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10992 \begin_layout Standard
10993 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10995 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10996 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10998 \begin_inset space ~
11004 There you find the following sizes:
11007 \begin_layout Standard
11020 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11025 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11027 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11031 \begin_inset Index idx
11034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11035 Document ! Settings
11040 for the paragraph separation.
11041 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11058 \begin_inset Index idx
11061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11067 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11068 An example: You have only two short paragraphs on one page with a vfill
11070 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11071 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11080 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11089 s are described in section
11090 \begin_inset space ~
11094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11096 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11105 If there are several
11109 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11110 You can therefore use
11114 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11117 \begin_layout Standard
11122 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11123 \begin_inset space ~
11127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11129 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11136 \begin_layout Standard
11137 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11148 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11160 \begin_layout Subsection
11161 Paragraph Alignment
11164 \begin_layout Standard
11165 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11167 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11171 There are five possibilities:
11174 \begin_layout Itemize
11182 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11188 \begin_layout Itemize
11196 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11202 \begin_layout Itemize
11210 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11216 \begin_layout Itemize
11224 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11230 \begin_layout Itemize
11238 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11244 \begin_layout Standard
11245 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11246 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11247 the left and right margins.
11248 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11251 \begin_layout Standard
11253 This paragraph is right aligned,
11256 \begin_layout Standard
11258 this one is centered,
11261 \begin_layout Standard
11263 this one is left aligned.
11266 \begin_layout Subsection
11268 \begin_inset Index idx
11271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11272 Page breaks ! Forced
11278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11280 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11287 \begin_layout Standard
11288 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11289 can force a page break where you want one.
11290 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11291 Only if you use a lot of
11295 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11298 \begin_layout Standard
11299 We recommend not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and
11300 until you have checked in the preview to see if you
11304 have to change the page breaking.
11307 \begin_layout Standard
11308 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11310 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11312 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11313 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11315 \begin_inset space ~
11321 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11323 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11324 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11326 \begin_inset space ~
11331 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11333 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11334 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11337 \begin_layout Standard
11338 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11339 at the top of a page.
11340 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11341 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11342 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11343 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11347 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11351 to learn more about
11358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11362 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11367 \begin_inset Index idx
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 Page breaks ! Clear
11379 \begin_layout Standard
11380 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11381 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11382 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11383 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed behind
11384 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11387 \begin_layout Standard
11388 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11390 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11391 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11393 \begin_inset space ~
11399 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11401 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11402 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11404 \begin_inset space ~
11408 \begin_inset space ~
11413 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11414 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11417 \begin_layout Subsection
11419 \begin_inset Index idx
11422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11431 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11438 \begin_layout Standard
11439 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: One that simply
11441 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11443 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11444 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11446 \begin_inset space ~
11450 \begin_inset space ~
11458 arg "newline-insert newline"
11462 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11464 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11465 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11467 \begin_inset space ~
11471 \begin_inset space ~
11476 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11478 This is useful to avoid
11479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11486 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11490 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11491 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11492 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to actively
11493 set a line break, e.
11494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11498 \begin_inset space \space{}
11501 in a poem or for an address (see sections
11502 \begin_inset space ~
11506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11508 reference "sec:Quote"
11513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11515 reference "sec:Verse"
11520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11522 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11529 \begin_layout Subsection
11531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11533 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11538 \begin_inset Index idx
11541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11550 \begin_layout Standard
11552 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11567 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11568 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11570 \begin_inset space ~
11575 you can insert horizontal lines.
11576 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11577 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11578 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11581 \begin_layout Standard
11583 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11594 \begin_layout Section
11595 Characters and Symbols
11598 \begin_layout Standard
11599 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11600 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter e.
11601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11605 \begin_inset space \space{}
11608 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11616 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11620 for information on how this is done.
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11629 dialog via the menu
11631 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11632 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11638 \begin_layout Standard
11639 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11647 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11648 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11649 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11657 \begin_layout Section
11658 Fonts and Text Styles
11659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11661 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11668 \begin_layout Subsection
11670 \begin_inset Index idx
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11682 \begin_layout Standard
11683 There are two types of fonts:
11686 \begin_layout Description
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset Index idx
11695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11701 are fonts, built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11706 characters) in the font.
11707 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11708 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11709 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11710 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11711 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11712 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11713 to provide a good image, it might be hard to provide a good rendering.
11714 \begin_inset Newline newline
11717 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11718 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11719 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11720 sizes than at small ones.
11721 \begin_inset Newline newline
11735 \begin_inset space ~
11743 \begin_layout Description
11745 \begin_inset space ~
11749 \begin_inset Index idx
11752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11758 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start, so they
11759 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11760 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11761 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11762 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in a
11763 picture manipulation program.
11764 In order to relieve this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11765 several fixed sizes typically from around 8 pixels high up to 34 pixels
11766 or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11767 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11768 to display each glyph, so bitmap fonts are thus faster displayed than scalable
11770 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11771 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11772 \begin_inset Newline newline
11775 Bitmap fonts are named
11778 \begin_inset space ~
11783 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11786 \begin_layout Standard
11787 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11788 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11789 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11790 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11791 use scalable fonts.
11794 \begin_layout Standard
11795 To test which fonts are used in a PDF-document, you can have a look into
11796 its document properties.
11799 \begin_layout Standard
11800 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11801 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11802 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11803 font to emphasize text, you use an
11804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11812 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11813 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11817 \begin_layout Subsection
11819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11821 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11828 \begin_layout Standard
11829 Traditionally, LaTeX uses its own fonts.
11830 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11831 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11833 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11834 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11835 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited, compared
11836 to usual word processors.
11837 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11838 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11839 across different machines.
11840 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX was increased a
11841 lot meanwhile so that you can find packages for many free and commercial
11843 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11845 \begin_inset space ~
11849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11851 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11856 However, all others are available if you enter the respective LaTeX code
11857 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11861 \begin_layout Standard
11862 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able to
11863 directly access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely
11865 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11866 By using them, you can use theoretically any OpenType or TrueType font
11867 that is installed on your system.
11868 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11871 \begin_layout Standard
11872 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11880 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11881 es; so you might have to experiment.
11889 \begin_layout Standard
11890 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11898 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11899 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11907 \begin_layout Subsection
11908 Document Font and Font size
11909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11911 name "sub:Document-Font"
11916 \begin_inset Index idx
11919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11926 \begin_inset Index idx
11929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11938 \begin_layout Standard
11939 You can set the document fonts in the
11941 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11945 \begin_inset Index idx
11948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 Document ! Settings
11959 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11960 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11963 \begin_inset space ~
11972 (monospaced) — you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for
11973 (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with
11977 \begin_layout Standard
11984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11993 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
11994 This requires that you use
12000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12039 as the output format, i.
12040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12044 \begin_inset space \space{}
12047 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12048 \begin_inset space ~
12052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12054 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12059 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12060 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12062 \begin_inset space ~
12065 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12066 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12067 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12069 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12072 \begin_layout Standard
12073 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12078 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12083 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12084 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12091 \begin_inset space ~
12097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12110 European Computer Modern
12113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12120 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12123 \begin_layout Standard
12132 are bitmap fonts, they often looks pixelated in PDF output, especially
12133 when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12138 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12141 \begin_inset space ~
12146 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12152 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12153 Depending on how your document should look like, you can either:
12156 \begin_layout Itemize
12160 \begin_inset space ~
12165 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12178 \begin_inset space ~
12183 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12187 as the default font.
12188 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12189 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12192 \begin_inset space ~
12205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12206 One difference is improved kerning.
12214 \begin_layout Itemize
12218 \begin_inset space ~
12222 \begin_inset space ~
12227 fonts in (the rare) case that
12230 \begin_inset space ~
12235 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12250 Virtual means that it
12251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12262 -glyphs from other fonts.
12263 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12285 Loading the LaTeX-package
12290 \begin_inset Index idx
12293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12294 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12299 with the document preamble line
12300 \begin_inset Newline newline
12307 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12308 \begin_inset Newline newline
12313 will fix the guillemet problem.
12318 and that accented characters are not
12322 glyph, but built of
12326 characters, the accent and the letter.
12327 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12333 If you search for example for the French word
12334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12341 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12350 and not for the glyph
12351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12355 \begin_inset space ~
12359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12365 \begin_layout Itemize
12366 If you do not like the look of
12374 , you can of course select one of the other provided vector fonts, e.
12375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12379 \begin_inset space ~
12385 \begin_inset space ~
12395 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12396 \begin_inset space ~
12399 serif and typewriter fonts,
12403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12404 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12411 \begin_inset space ~
12420 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12425 \begin_inset space \space{}
12433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12437 \begin_inset space \space{}
12443 \begin_inset space ~
12451 \begin_inset space ~
12461 but you can also select your own.
12462 \begin_inset Newline newline
12465 The differences between roman,
12468 \begin_inset space ~
12477 fonts are explained in section
12478 \begin_inset space ~
12482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12484 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12489 \begin_inset Newline newline
12495 \begin_inset space ~
12500 was originally designed for newspapers.
12501 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12502 into the small newspaper columns.
12506 \begin_inset space ~
12511 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12514 \begin_layout Standard
12515 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12528 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12533 depends on the class you are using.
12534 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12537 \begin_layout Standard
12538 Note that the font size is the
12543 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12544 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12545 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12548 \begin_inset space ~
12554 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12555 \begin_inset space ~
12559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12561 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12568 \begin_layout Standard
12573 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12575 \begin_inset space ~
12578 serif or typewriter.
12583 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12593 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) also use other defaults.
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12614 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12620 \begin_inset Index idx
12623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12624 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12630 \begin_inset space ~
12634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12636 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12641 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12642 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12649 \begin_layout Standard
12650 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12652 Use Old Style Figures
12656 Use True Small Caps
12659 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12662 Use Old Style Figures
12664 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12666 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12674 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lower
12678 Use True Small Caps
12680 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12681 of scaled capitals.
12682 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12683 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12686 \begin_layout Standard
12691 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12692 a font to display the script characters.
12696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12697 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12702 \begin_inset Index idx
12705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12706 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12711 So this has no effect for the document language
12727 \begin_layout Standard
12728 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12732 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12740 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12744 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12745 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12746 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12748 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12751 dialog, see section
12752 \begin_inset space ~
12756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12758 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12770 \begin_layout Subsection
12771 Using Different Character Styles
12772 \begin_inset Index idx
12775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12782 \begin_inset Index idx
12785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12794 \begin_layout Standard
12795 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12796 certain paragraph environments.
12797 LyX supports two character styles,
12806 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12810 \begin_layout Standard
12815 style, do one of the following:
12818 \begin_layout Itemize
12819 click on the toolbar button
12828 \begin_layout Itemize
12829 use the key binding
12838 \begin_layout Standard
12839 These commands are all toggles.
12844 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12847 \begin_layout Standard
12848 One typically uses the
12852 style for proper names.
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12861 is the original author of LyX.
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12868 \begin_layout Standard
12869 A more widely used character style is the
12874 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12881 \begin_layout Itemize
12882 clicking on the toolbar button
12891 \begin_layout Itemize
12892 using the keybindings
12901 \begin_layout Standard
12906 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12907 es use a different font.
12910 \begin_layout Standard
12911 We've been using the
12915 style all over the place in this document.
12916 Here's one more example:
12919 \begin_layout Quotation
12922 Do not overuse character styles!
12925 \begin_layout Standard
12926 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12927 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12928 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12929 the common tendency to overuse character style.
12933 \begin_layout Standard
12934 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12942 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12944 \begin_inset space ~
12952 \begin_layout Subsection
12953 Fine-Tuning with the
12958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12960 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12965 \begin_inset Index idx
12968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12977 \begin_layout Standard
12978 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning, so
12979 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12980 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12981 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12982 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12983 from ordinary dialog.
12986 \begin_layout Standard
12987 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12988 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12989 \begin_inset Newline newline
12992 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not well readable and
12993 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12996 \begin_layout Standard
12997 To use custom character styles, open the
12999 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13004 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13007 dialog or press the toolbar button
13010 arg "dialog-show character"
13014 There are several boxes on this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13015 font property that you can choose.
13016 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13024 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13029 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13030 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13031 environments in a snap.
13034 \begin_layout Standard
13035 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13038 \begin_inset space ~
13050 \begin_layout Labeling
13051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13065 The possible options are:
13069 \begin_layout Labeling
13070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13075 This is the Roman font family.
13076 Normally a serif font.
13077 It's also the default family.
13087 \begin_layout Labeling
13088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13099 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13111 \begin_layout Labeling
13112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13119 This is the Typewriter font family.
13125 arg "font-typewriter"
13134 \begin_layout Labeling
13135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13140 This corresponds to the print weight.
13145 \begin_layout Labeling
13146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13151 This is the Medium font series.
13152 It's also the default series.
13155 \begin_layout Labeling
13156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13163 This is the Bold font series.
13176 \begin_layout Labeling
13177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13182 As the name implies.
13187 \begin_layout Labeling
13188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13193 This is the Upright font shape.
13194 It's also the default shape.
13197 \begin_layout Labeling
13198 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13212 s the Italic font shape
13218 \begin_layout Labeling
13219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13226 This is the Slanted font shape
13228 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13231 \begin_layout Labeling
13232 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13243 This is the Small caps font shape
13250 \begin_layout Labeling
13251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13256 Alters the size of the font.
13257 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13258 proportional to the document font size.
13259 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13260 what you want to do.
13265 \begin_layout Labeling
13266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13287 arg "font-size tiny"
13293 \begin_layout Labeling
13294 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13315 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13321 \begin_layout Labeling
13322 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13343 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13349 \begin_layout Labeling
13350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13371 arg "font-size small"
13377 \begin_layout Labeling
13378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13392 It's also the default size.
13396 arg "font-size normal"
13402 \begin_layout Labeling
13403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13424 arg "font-size large"
13430 \begin_layout Labeling
13431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13452 arg "font-size larger"
13458 \begin_layout Labeling
13459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13480 arg "font-size largest"
13486 \begin_layout Labeling
13487 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13508 arg "font-size huge"
13514 \begin_layout Labeling
13515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13536 arg "font-size giant"
13542 \begin_layout Labeling
13543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13548 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13568 arg "font-size increase"
13574 \begin_layout Labeling
13575 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13580 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13600 arg "font-size decrease"
13607 \begin_layout Standard
13612 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13613 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13614 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13615 — use those instead.
13616 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13619 \begin_layout Labeling
13620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13625 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13630 \begin_layout Labeling
13631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13638 This is text with emphasize on
13641 This might seem like the same as
13645 , but it is actually a bit different.
13651 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13653 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13656 \begin_layout Labeling
13657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13664 This is text with Underbar on.
13670 arg "font-underline"
13676 \begin_inset Newline newline
13681 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13682 when you could not change fonts.
13683 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13684 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13688 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13691 \begin_layout Labeling
13692 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13696 \begin_inset space ~
13703 This is text with Double underbar on.
13709 arg "font-underunderline"
13713 \begin_inset Newline newline
13716 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13717 about double underbar.
13720 \begin_layout Labeling
13721 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13725 \begin_inset space ~
13732 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13738 arg "font-underwave"
13742 \begin_inset Newline newline
13745 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13746 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13749 \begin_layout Labeling
13750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13757 This is text with Strikeout on.
13763 arg "font-strikeout"
13767 \begin_inset Newline newline
13770 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13771 changed in the meantime.
13774 \begin_layout Labeling
13775 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13782 This is text with Noun on.
13789 , this is a logical attribute.
13790 Normally it's equivalent to
13793 \begin_inset space ~
13802 \begin_layout Labeling
13803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13808 You can adjust the color of the text with this control.
13809 Notice that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13818 , which is the default
13819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13826 and means normally black, you can choose between
13859 \begin_inset Index idx
13862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13871 \begin_layout Labeling
13872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13877 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13878 the language of the document.
13879 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13881 \begin_inset Newline newline
13884 If you have for example a longer German Text in your document, LaTeX respects
13885 the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13886 When using the spell checking (see section
13887 \begin_inset space ~
13891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13893 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13897 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13900 \begin_layout Standard
13901 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13902 Once you've chosen a new character style via the
13904 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13906 \begin_inset space ~
13911 dialog, the settings are saved.
13912 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13915 arg "textstyle-apply"
13919 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13923 \begin_layout Standard
13924 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13931 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13932 (suppose you just set the shape to
13933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13951 \begin_inset space ~
13963 \begin_layout Standard
13964 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13972 \begin_inset space ~
13984 \begin_layout Itemize
13990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13997 font, which means every character has the same width; the
13998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14015 \begin_inset Newline newline
14019 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14033 \begin_inset Note Note
14036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14037 For more on phantoms see section
14038 \begin_inset space ~
14042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14044 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14054 \begin_inset Newline newline
14060 \begin_layout Itemize
14065 fonts use characters with serifs.
14066 These are the small
14067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14074 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14075 The following example shows the difference:
14076 \begin_inset Newline newline
14080 \begin_inset Newline newline
14085 text without serifs
14088 \begin_inset Newline newline
14091 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14092 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14099 \begin_layout Itemize
14104 is not recommended to use a base type.
14105 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14106 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14109 \begin_layout Standard
14110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14117 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14118 When a property is marked for toggling in the Text Style dialog, applying
14119 the style to text that already has the property will cause the property
14121 If you for example apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14122 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14123 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14141 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14142 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14150 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14154 \begin_inset space ~
14159 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14175 \begin_inset space \space{}
14179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14197 \begin_inset space ~
14202 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14211 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14214 \begin_layout Standard
14215 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14216 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14219 \begin_layout Section
14220 Printing and Previewing
14223 \begin_layout Subsection
14227 \begin_layout Standard
14228 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14229 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14230 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14231 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14232 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14234 Additional Features
14239 \begin_layout Standard
14240 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14241 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14242 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14243 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14244 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14245 This happens in two stages:
14248 \begin_layout Enumerate
14249 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14250 generating a file with the extension,
14251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14265 \begin_layout Enumerate
14266 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14270 file to produce printable output.
14274 \begin_layout Subsection
14275 Output file formats
14276 \begin_inset Index idx
14279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14288 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14296 Simple text (ASCII)
14297 \begin_inset Index idx
14300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14301 File formats ! ASCII
14309 \begin_layout Standard
14310 This file type has the extension
14311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14323 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14327 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14334 \begin_layout Standard
14335 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14337 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14338 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14340 \begin_inset space ~
14347 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14348 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14350 \begin_inset space ~
14354 \begin_inset space ~
14360 The latter will first internally export to PostScript and then do the conversio
14364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14366 \begin_inset Index idx
14369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14370 File formats ! LaTeX
14378 \begin_layout Standard
14379 This file type has the extension
14380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14391 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14393 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14394 it manually with console commands.
14395 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14396 you view or export your document.
14399 \begin_layout Standard
14400 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14402 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14403 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14418 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14419 \begin_inset space ~
14423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14425 reference "sub:Export"
14432 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14434 \begin_inset Index idx
14437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14446 \begin_layout Standard
14447 This file type has the extension
14448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14469 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14470 DVIs are used for quick previews and as pre-stage for other output formats,
14474 \begin_layout Standard
14475 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14476 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14477 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14478 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14479 when you view the DVI.
14480 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14483 \begin_layout Standard
14484 You can export your document to DVI by the menu
14486 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14487 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14492 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14493 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14495 \begin_inset space ~
14502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14512 The latter option uses the program
14521 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14522 font access (see section
14523 \begin_inset space ~
14527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14529 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14534 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14535 standard TeX processor.
14538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14540 \begin_inset Index idx
14543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14544 File formats ! PostScript
14552 \begin_layout Standard
14553 This file type has the extension
14554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14566 PostScript was developed by the company
14570 as a printer language.
14571 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14573 PostScript can be seen as a
14574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14577 programming language
14578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14581 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14586 When you are interested to learn more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-packa
14592 \begin_inset Index idx
14595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14596 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14606 Due to this ability, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14609 \begin_layout Standard
14610 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14614 Encapsulated PostScript
14615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14618 (EPS, file extension
14619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14631 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14632 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14638 \begin_inset space \space{}
14642 \begin_inset space ~
14645 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14646 \begin_inset space ~
14649 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14650 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14651 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14652 EPS to avoid this problem.
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14656 You can export your document to PostScript using the menu
14658 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14659 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14665 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14667 \begin_inset Index idx
14670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14677 \begin_inset Index idx
14680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14689 \begin_layout Standard
14690 This file type has the extension
14691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14707 Portable Document Format
14708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14715 was derived from PostScript.
14716 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14725 implies, it can be processed at any computer system and the printed output
14726 looks exactly the same.
14729 \begin_layout Standard
14730 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14734 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14738 (JPG, file extension
14739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14766 Portable Network Graphics
14767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14770 (PNG, file extension
14771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14783 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14784 background to one of these formats.
14785 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14786 will slow down your workflow.
14787 So we recommend using images in one of the three mentioned formats.
14790 \begin_layout Standard
14791 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14793 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14799 \begin_layout Description
14801 \begin_inset space ~
14804 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14808 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14809 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14813 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14814 So this export variant consist of three conversions.
14817 \begin_layout Description
14819 \begin_inset space ~
14822 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14826 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14830 \begin_layout Description
14832 \begin_inset space ~
14835 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14839 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14842 \begin_layout Description
14844 \begin_inset space ~
14851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14858 X) This uses the program
14862 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14867 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14868 font access (see section
14869 \begin_inset space ~
14873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14875 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14880 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example verticall
14881 y written Japanese.
14884 \begin_layout Description
14886 \begin_inset space ~
14893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14900 X) This uses the program
14904 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14909 is an even newer engine, derived from
14913 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14914 access (see section
14915 \begin_inset space ~
14919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14921 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14926 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14927 standard TeX processor.
14930 \begin_layout Standard
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14943 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14944 works without problems.
14945 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14946 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
14950 \begin_inset space ~
14957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14969 \begin_inset space ~
14976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14985 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
14993 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14995 \begin_inset Index idx
14998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14999 FileFormats ! XHTML
15005 \begin_inset Index idx
15008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15017 \begin_layout Standard
15018 This file type has the extension
15019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15031 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15032 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15033 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15034 suitable for the purpose.
15035 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15037 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15038 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15041 between different formats, which are described in section
15043 Math Output in XHTML
15048 \begin_inset space ~
15056 \begin_layout Standard
15057 XHTML output remains
15058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15065 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15068 LyX and the World Wide Web
15072 Additional Features
15074 manual, for more information.
15077 \begin_layout Standard
15078 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15080 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15081 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15087 \begin_layout Subsection
15089 \begin_inset Index idx
15092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15101 \begin_layout Standard
15102 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15103 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15112 or use the toolbar button
15119 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15120 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15127 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15131 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15139 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15144 Further output formats can be selected via
15146 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15149 or the toolbar button
15150 \begin_inset Graphics
15151 filename ../images/view-others.png
15153 groupId toolbarbuttons
15160 \begin_layout Standard
15161 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15162 viewer window using the menu
15164 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15169 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15170 Update (Other Formats)
15175 \begin_layout Standard
15176 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15178 To have a real output, export your document.
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15182 Printing the File from within LyX
15183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15185 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15192 \begin_layout Standard
15193 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15194 it directly from within LyX.
15195 To print a file, select the menu
15197 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15200 or click on the toolbar button
15203 arg "dialog-show print"
15207 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15208 This file is then processed by the program
15212 to PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15217 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15220 \begin_layout Standard
15221 You can choose to print only even-numbered or odd-numbered pages — this
15222 is useful for printing on two sides: You can re-insert the pages after
15223 printing one set to print on the other side.
15224 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15225 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15226 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15229 \begin_layout Standard
15230 You can set the following print parameters in the
15233 \begin_inset space ~
15241 \begin_layout Labeling
15242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15247 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15252 Note that this printer name is for the program
15261 has to be configured for this printer name.
15262 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15263 \begin_inset space ~
15267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15269 reference "sub:Printer"
15278 The printer should understand PostScript.
15281 \begin_layout Labeling
15282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15287 The name of a file to print to.
15288 The output will be a PostScript file.
15289 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15293 \begin_layout Section
15294 A few Words about Typography
15295 \begin_inset Index idx
15298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15307 \begin_layout Subsection
15308 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15309 \begin_inset Index idx
15312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15319 \begin_inset Index idx
15322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15331 \begin_layout Standard
15333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15344 character comes in four lengths: the
15356 , and the minus sign:
15357 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15363 \begin_layout Standard
15364 \begin_inset Tabular
15365 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15366 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15367 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15368 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15369 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15370 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15399 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15439 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15464 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15466 \begin_inset space ~
15469 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15476 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15501 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15503 \begin_inset space ~
15506 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15527 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15561 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15567 \begin_layout Standard
15568 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15580 character multiple times in a row.
15581 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15582 the final output, but not in LyX.
15584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15614 \begin_layout Standard
15615 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15616 math mode and has a length of its own.
15617 Here are some examples:
15620 \begin_layout Enumerate
15621 line- and page-breaks
15622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15632 \begin_layout Enumerate
15634 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15644 \begin_layout Enumerate
15645 Oh — there's a dash.
15646 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15656 \begin_layout Enumerate
15657 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15661 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15671 \begin_layout Subsection
15673 \begin_inset Index idx
15676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15685 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15692 \begin_layout Standard
15693 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15694 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15699 \begin_inset Index idx
15702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15703 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15708 following the rules of the document language.
15711 \begin_layout Standard
15712 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly, it only has problems with text in the
15717 font and with unusual constructs, like
15718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15726 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15728 This is done with the menu
15730 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15731 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15733 \begin_inset space ~
15739 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15740 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15743 \begin_layout Standard
15744 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15745 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15755 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15763 as a hyphenation possibility.
15764 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15765 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15766 as described in section
15767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15770 Prevent Hyphenation
15771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15777 \begin_inset space ~
15785 \begin_layout Subsection
15787 \begin_inset Index idx
15790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15799 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15800 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15803 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15810 \begin_layout Standard
15811 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15812 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15813 LaTeX then adds the
15814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15817 appropriate amount of space
15818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15822 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15824 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15825 gets after another word.
15828 \begin_layout Standard
15829 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15830 not work in all cases.
15832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15843 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15844 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15847 \begin_layout Standard
15848 Here are some examples of
15852 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15855 \begin_layout Itemize
15860 \begin_layout Itemize
15865 \begin_layout Standard
15866 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15869 \begin_layout Itemize
15871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15875 this is too much space!
15878 \begin_layout Itemize
15883 \begin_layout Standard
15884 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15887 \begin_layout Standard
15888 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15891 \begin_layout Enumerate
15895 \begin_inset space ~
15900 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15901 \begin_inset space ~
15905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15907 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15912 \begin_inset Index idx
15915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15916 Spaces ! inter-word
15924 \begin_layout Enumerate
15928 \begin_inset space ~
15933 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15934 \begin_inset space ~
15938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15940 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15945 \begin_inset Index idx
15948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15957 \begin_layout Enumerate
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15969 \begin_inset space ~
15976 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15978 \begin_inset space ~
15983 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15984 This function is also bound to
15987 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15993 \begin_layout Standard
15994 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15997 \begin_layout Itemize
15999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16003 \begin_inset space \space{}
16006 this is too much space!
16009 \begin_layout Itemize
16010 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16014 \begin_layout Standard
16015 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16016 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16017 will take care of this.
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16025 \begin_inset space ~
16030 feature described in section
16036 Additional Features
16041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16043 \begin_inset Index idx
16046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16047 Typography ! Quotes
16053 \begin_inset Index idx
16056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16087 \begin_layout Standard
16088 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16089 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16090 and use a closing quote at the end.
16092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16100 The keyboard character,
16104 , generates this automatically.
16107 \begin_layout Standard
16108 You can specify what character the
16112 key produces using the submenu
16118 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16122 \begin_inset Index idx
16125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16126 Document ! Settings
16136 There are six choices:
16139 \begin_layout Labeling
16140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16152 Use quotes like this
16153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16163 \begin_layout Labeling
16164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16167 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16171 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16177 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16181 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16187 \begin_layout Labeling
16188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16191 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16195 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16201 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16205 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16211 \begin_layout Labeling
16212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16215 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16219 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16225 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16229 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16235 \begin_layout Labeling
16236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16239 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16243 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16249 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16253 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16259 \begin_layout Labeling
16260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16263 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16267 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16273 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16277 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16283 \begin_layout Subsection
16285 \begin_inset Index idx
16288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 Typography ! Ligatures
16295 \begin_inset Index idx
16298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16329 name "sub:Ligatures"
16336 \begin_layout Standard
16337 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16338 print them as single characters.
16339 These groups are known as
16344 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16346 Here are the standard ligatures:
16349 \begin_layout Itemize
16353 \begin_layout Itemize
16357 \begin_layout Itemize
16361 \begin_layout Itemize
16365 \begin_layout Itemize
16369 \begin_layout Standard
16370 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16373 \begin_layout Standard
16374 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16375 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16383 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16399 To break a ligature, use
16401 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16402 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16404 \begin_inset space ~
16411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16422 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16439 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16447 \begin_layout Subsection
16449 \begin_inset Index idx
16452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16461 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16468 \begin_layout Standard
16469 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16470 characters in different sizes and heights.
16471 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16472 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16492 \begin_inset Note Note
16495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16496 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16504 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16505 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16510 Note the order of the upper-and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the following
16514 \begin_layout Description
16515 LyX The name of the game, write
16516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16537 \begin_layout Description
16538 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16560 \begin_layout Description
16561 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16583 \begin_layout Description
16584 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16606 \begin_layout Standard
16607 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16612 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16620 It's an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16621 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16622 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16625 : The actual version is
16626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16633 , the previous one was
16634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16644 \begin_layout Standard
16645 If you don't want to use proper names, e.
16646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16650 \begin_inset space \space{}
16653 in section headings, you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the
16655 This will look in LyX like:
16656 \begin_inset Graphics
16657 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16663 \begin_inset Newline newline
16666 For more about TeX Code, look at section
16667 \begin_inset space ~
16671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16673 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16680 \begin_layout Subsection
16682 \begin_inset Index idx
16685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16694 \begin_layout Standard
16695 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16696 space between two words.
16697 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16707 for units use the menu
16709 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16710 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16712 \begin_inset space ~
16720 arg "space-insert thin"
16726 \begin_layout Standard
16727 Here is an example to show the differences:
16730 \begin_layout Standard
16731 \begin_inset Tabular
16732 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16733 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16734 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16735 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16742 \begin_inset space ~
16746 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16758 space between number and unit
16765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16774 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16786 half space between number and unit
16799 \begin_layout Subsection
16801 \begin_inset Index idx
16804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16805 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16813 \begin_layout Standard
16814 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16816 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16817 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16818 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16819 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16820 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16821 These bits of text became known as
16832 \begin_layout Standard
16833 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16834 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16835 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16836 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16837 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16838 to specifically prevent widows and orphans.
16839 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16842 \begin_layout Standard
16843 There's no way we can go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page,
16844 or how you can tweak that behavior.
16845 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16846 \begin_inset space ~
16850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16852 key "latexcompanion"
16857 \begin_inset space ~
16861 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16867 ) may have more information.
16868 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16871 \begin_layout Chapter
16872 Notes, Graphics, Tables, and Floats
16873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16875 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16882 \begin_layout Standard
16883 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16886 \begin_inset space ~
16892 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16895 \begin_layout Section
16897 \begin_inset Index idx
16900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16916 \begin_layout Standard
16917 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16920 \begin_layout Description
16922 \begin_inset space ~
16925 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16926 \begin_inset Newline newline
16930 \begin_inset Note Note
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16934 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16942 \begin_layout Description
16943 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
16944 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16946 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16947 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16949 \begin_inset space ~
16955 \begin_inset Newline newline
16959 \begin_inset Note Comment
16962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16963 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
16971 \begin_layout Description
16973 \begin_inset space ~
16976 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16977 set in the document settings under
16979 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16981 \begin_inset space ~
16987 \begin_inset Newline newline
16991 \begin_inset Newline newline
16995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17004 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17005 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17010 of a comment that appears in the output.
17016 \begin_inset Newline newline
17020 \begin_inset Newline newline
17023 As you can see in the example, the first line of greyed out notes is a bit
17024 indented and greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17027 \begin_layout Standard
17028 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17036 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17040 Right-click on the appearing note box to select the note type.
17043 \begin_layout Section
17045 \begin_inset Index idx
17048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17057 name "sec:Footnotes"
17064 \begin_layout Standard
17065 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17068 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17071 or the toolbar button
17074 arg "footnote-insert"
17086 \begin_inset Graphics
17087 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17096 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17125 label, the box will
17129 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17130 Clicking on the box label again, will close
17143 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17144 and click on the footnote
17159 \begin_layout Standard
17160 Here is an example footnote:
17168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17169 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17177 \begin_layout Standard
17178 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17179 position where the footnote box is placed.
17180 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17181 The footnote number is calculated by LyX.
17182 The numbers are consecutive, no matter in which chapter the footnote is
17184 LyX doesn't support other numbering schemes yet, but you can get other
17185 schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17190 ey are described in the
17193 \begin_inset space ~
17201 \begin_layout Section
17203 \begin_inset Index idx
17206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17215 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17222 \begin_layout Standard
17223 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17224 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17226 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17233 or the toolbar button
17236 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17262 appearing within your text.
17263 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17272 \begin_layout Standard
17273 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17277 \begin_inset Marginal
17280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17281 This is a marginal note.
17289 \begin_layout Standard
17290 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17291 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17292 pages, right on odd pages.
17295 \begin_layout Standard
17296 For further information about marginal notes see section
17299 \begin_inset space ~
17307 \begin_inset space ~
17315 \begin_layout Section
17316 Graphics and Images
17317 \begin_inset Index idx
17320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17327 \begin_inset Index idx
17330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17339 name "sec:Graphics"
17346 \begin_layout Standard
17347 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17348 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17351 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17356 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17360 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17363 \begin_layout Standard
17364 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17369 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17370 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17372 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17379 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17386 \begin_layout Standard
17391 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17392 of the image in the output.
17393 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17397 \begin_inset space ~
17401 \begin_inset space ~
17410 \begin_inset space ~
17414 \begin_inset space ~
17418 \begin_inset space ~
17423 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17424 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17432 \begin_layout Standard
17435 LaTeX and LyX options
17437 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17438 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17447 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17448 with the image size is printed.
17452 \begin_inset space ~
17456 \begin_inset space ~
17460 \begin_inset space ~
17465 is explained in the
17468 \begin_inset space ~
17480 \begin_layout Standard
17481 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17482 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17484 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17488 \begin_layout Standard
17490 \begin_inset Graphics
17491 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17499 \begin_layout Standard
17500 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17501 the image into a float, see section
17502 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17508 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17515 \begin_layout Subsection
17517 \begin_inset Index idx
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17529 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17536 \begin_layout Standard
17537 You can insert images in any known file format.
17538 But as we explained in section
17539 \begin_inset space ~
17543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17545 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17549 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17550 LyX therefore uses the program
17554 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17555 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17556 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17557 \begin_inset space ~
17561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17563 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17570 \begin_layout Standard
17571 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17574 \begin_layout Description
17576 \begin_inset space ~
17579 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17580 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17581 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17585 Graphics Interchange Format
17586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17589 (GIF, file extension
17590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17602 \begin_inset Index idx
17605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17637 Portable Network Graphics
17638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17641 (PNG, file extension
17642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17654 \begin_inset Index idx
17657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17689 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17693 (JPG, file extension
17694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17718 \begin_inset Index idx
17721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17752 \begin_layout Description
17754 \begin_inset space ~
17757 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17759 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17760 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17761 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17762 \begin_inset Newline newline
17765 Scalable image formats can be
17766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17769 Scalable Vector Graphics
17770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17773 (SVG, file extension
17774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17786 \begin_inset Index idx
17789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17821 Encapsulated PostScript
17822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17825 (EPS, file extension
17826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17838 \begin_inset Index idx
17841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17873 Portable Document Format
17874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17877 (PDF, file extension
17878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17890 \begin_inset Index idx
17893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17908 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
17909 result will not be scalable.
17910 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17916 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17924 \begin_layout Standard
17925 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only vice
17929 \begin_layout Subsection
17930 Grouping of Image Settings
17931 \begin_inset Index idx
17934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17935 Images ! Settings grouping
17943 \begin_layout Standard
17944 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17946 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17947 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17949 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17950 need to manually change each of them.
17954 \begin_layout Standard
17955 A new group can be set by entering a name in the
17958 \begin_inset space ~
17963 field in the Graphics dialog.
17964 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
17965 by checking the name of the desired group.
17968 \begin_layout Section
17970 \begin_inset Index idx
17973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17989 \begin_layout Standard
17990 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
17993 arg "tabular-insert"
17998 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18002 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18003 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18004 from the rest of the table.
18005 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18006 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18008 Here is an example table:
18011 \begin_layout Standard
18013 \begin_inset Tabular
18014 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18015 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18016 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18017 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18018 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18219 \begin_layout Subsection
18223 \begin_layout Standard
18224 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button, which
18225 brings up the table dialog.
18226 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell and row/column respectively
18227 where the cursor is placed currently.
18228 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18229 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18230 done on all of your selection.
18233 \begin_layout Standard
18234 In addition to the table dialog, the
18237 \begin_inset space ~
18242 helps you in setting table properties.
18243 It appears when the cursor is inside a table.
18246 \begin_layout Standard
18250 \begin_inset space ~
18255 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18256 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18257 current cell respectively.
18258 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18260 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18261 of text, see section
18262 \begin_inset space ~
18266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18268 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18275 \begin_layout Standard
18276 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18277 using the check box
18286 This will merge the cells to
18290 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18291 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18292 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18293 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18294 in the last row without the upper border:
18297 \begin_layout Standard
18299 \begin_inset Tabular
18300 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18301 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18302 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18303 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="0">
18304 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18325 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18401 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18436 \begin_layout Standard
18437 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18438 They are necessary for special table formatting, like for multirow cells,
18439 explained in the chapter
18446 \begin_inset space ~
18453 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469967
18457 \begin_layout Standard
18459 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469996
18460 The argument must contain one of the following:
18463 \begin_layout Description
18465 \change_inserted 5863208 1338470006
18466 l left-justified column
18469 \begin_layout Description
18471 \change_inserted 5863208 1338470011
18475 \begin_layout Description
18477 \change_inserted 5863208 1338470016
18478 r right-justified column
18481 \begin_layout Description
18483 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469985
18484 p{width} paragraph column with text vertically aligned at the top
18487 \begin_layout Standard
18489 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469985
18490 By default, if the text in a column is too wide for the page, LaTeX won’t
18491 automatically wrap it.
18492 Using p{width} you can define a special type of column which will wrap-around
18493 the text as in a normal paragraph.
18494 You can pass the width using any unit supported by LaTeX, such as pt and
18495 cm, or command lengths, such as
18500 \begin_layout Standard
18502 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469985
18503 Additionally it can contain, before or after the column type:
18506 \begin_layout Description
18508 \change_inserted 5863208 1338470140
18512 \begin_layout Description
18514 \change_inserted 5863208 1338470146
18515 || double vertical line
18518 \begin_layout Description
18520 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469985
18521 @{...} column seperator
18524 \begin_layout Standard
18526 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469985
18527 The column seperator is particularly useful.
18528 It typically takes some text as its argument, and when appended to a column,
18529 it will automatically insert that text into each cell in that column before
18530 the actual data for that cell.
18531 This command kills the inter-column space and replaces it with whatever
18532 is between the curly braces.
18533 To add space, use @{
18536 To remove the space entirely use @{}
18539 \begin_layout Standard
18541 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469985
18545 \begin_layout Description
18547 \change_inserted 5863208 1338470167
18548 "r@{}" - set text right aligned and kill the inter-column space.
18551 \begin_layout Description
18553 \change_inserted 5863208 1338470172
18554 "@{}l" - set text left aligned and kill the inter-column space.
18555 Typically these two are used together
18558 \begin_layout Description
18560 \change_inserted 5863208 1338469985
18561 "(r)" - draw every element in the column surrounded with brackets
18564 \begin_layout Standard
18565 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18569 degrees counterclockwise.
18570 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18573 \begin_layout Standard
18574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 Most DVI-viewers are
18586 able to display rotations.
18594 \begin_layout Standard
18599 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18604 adds lines for all cell borders.
18607 \begin_layout Subsection
18609 \begin_inset Index idx
18612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18613 Tables ! Longtables
18619 \begin_inset Index idx
18622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18631 \begin_layout Standard
18632 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18635 \begin_inset space ~
18639 \begin_inset space ~
18648 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18649 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18652 \begin_layout Description
18657 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18658 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable;
18659 except for the first page, if
18662 \begin_inset space ~
18670 \begin_layout Description
18674 \begin_inset space ~
18679 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18680 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18683 \begin_layout Description
18688 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18689 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable;
18690 except for the last page, if
18693 \begin_inset space ~
18701 \begin_layout Description
18705 \begin_inset space ~
18710 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18711 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18714 \begin_layout Description
18715 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18716 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18718 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18722 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18725 \begin_inset space ~
18733 \begin_layout Standard
18734 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18735 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18736 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18742 In this context, first means first in this order:
18745 \begin_inset space ~
18757 \begin_inset space ~
18762 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18765 \begin_layout Standard
18767 \begin_inset Tabular
18768 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18769 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18770 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18771 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18772 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18773 <row endfirsthead="true">
18774 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18780 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18785 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18804 <row endfirsthead="true">
18805 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18837 <row endhead="true">
18838 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18849 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18868 <row endhead="true">
18869 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18901 <row endfoot="true">
18902 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18913 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18922 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18953 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20047 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20481 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <row endlastfoot="true">
20884 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20895 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 \begin_layout Subsection
20923 \begin_inset Index idx
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20935 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20942 \begin_layout Standard
20943 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20944 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20945 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20946 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20950 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20953 \begin_layout Standard
20954 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20955 for the column in the table dialog.
20956 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20957 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20961 \begin_layout Standard
20963 \begin_inset Tabular
20964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20965 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20967 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20988 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 This is longer now.
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21170 This is longer now.
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21201 \begin_layout Standard
21202 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21203 You can cut and paste even more than one row.
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 Note, that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would
21209 not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21215 Selection with the mouse or with
21219 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21220 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21221 the selection from outside the table.
21224 \begin_layout Section
21226 \begin_inset Index idx
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21245 \begin_layout Subsection
21249 \begin_layout Standard
21250 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21251 have a fixed location.
21253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21260 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21268 \begin_inset space ~
21273 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21274 too many notes on the current page.
21277 \begin_layout Standard
21278 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21279 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21280 and pages without text.
21281 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21282 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21283 Floats are therefore numbered.
21284 Referencing is described in section
21285 \begin_inset space ~
21289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21291 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21298 \begin_layout Standard
21299 To insert a float, use the menu
21301 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21305 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21306 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21308 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21309 \begin_inset Index idx
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21319 paragraph within the float.
21320 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21321 by left-clicking on the box label.
21322 A closed float box looks like this:
21323 \begin_inset Graphics
21324 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21329 – a gray button with a red label.
21332 \begin_layout Standard
21333 It is recommended to insert floats as a separate paragraph to avoid possible
21334 LaTeX-errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21337 \begin_layout Subsection
21341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21345 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21350 \begin_inset Index idx
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 Floats ! Figure floats
21362 \begin_layout Standard
21364 \begin_inset space ~
21368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21370 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21374 was created using the menu
21376 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21377 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21380 or the toolbar button
21383 arg "float-insert figure"
21387 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21390 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21393 or the toolbar button
21396 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21400 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21401 in front of or behind the image and using the menu
21403 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21405 \begin_inset space ~
21410 or the toolbar button
21413 arg "layout-paragraph"
21419 \begin_layout Standard
21420 \begin_inset Float figure
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 \begin_inset Graphics
21428 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 \begin_inset Caption
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21443 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21447 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21460 \begin_layout Standard
21461 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21462 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21464 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21467 or the toolbar button
21473 and refer to it using the menu
21475 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21478 or the toolbar button
21481 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21485 It is important to use references to figure floats, rather than using vague
21487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21494 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21504 For more about cross-references, see section
21505 \begin_inset space ~
21509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21511 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21518 \begin_layout Standard
21519 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21520 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21521 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21522 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21523 as described in section
21524 \begin_inset space ~
21528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21530 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21536 \begin_inset space ~
21540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21542 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21546 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21547 You can also set the images one below the other.
21549 \begin_inset space ~
21553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21555 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21562 reference "fig:Platypus"
21566 are the subfigures.
21569 \begin_layout Standard
21570 \begin_inset Float figure
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21580 \begin_inset Float figure
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 \begin_inset Caption
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21591 name "fig:Undefinable"
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 \begin_inset Graphics
21605 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21620 \begin_inset Float figure
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 \begin_inset Caption
21628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21631 name "fig:Platypus"
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 \begin_inset Graphics
21645 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21657 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21664 \begin_inset Caption
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21669 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21673 Two distorted images.
21686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21688 \begin_inset Index idx
21691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21692 Floats ! Table floats
21700 \begin_layout Standard
21701 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21703 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21704 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21707 or the toolbar button
21710 arg "float-insert table"
21714 They have the same properties as figure floats except for the different
21717 \begin_inset space ~
21721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21723 reference "tab:Table-float"
21730 \begin_layout Standard
21731 \begin_inset Float table
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 \begin_inset Caption
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21742 name "tab:Table-float"
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 \begin_inset Tabular
21757 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21758 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21759 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21761 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21909 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21912 \end{array}\right]$
21920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21954 \begin_layout Subsection
21956 \begin_inset Index idx
21959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21968 \begin_layout Standard
21969 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21970 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21971 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21973 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in chapter
21981 \begin_inset space ~
21989 \begin_layout Section
21991 \begin_inset Index idx
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22003 name "sec:Minipages"
22010 \begin_layout Standard
22011 LaTeX provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page,
22013 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22014 \begin_inset space \space{}
22021 \begin_layout Standard
22022 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22024 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22028 Right-clicking on the box allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22029 and its alignment within the page.
22032 \begin_layout Standard
22034 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22044 height_special "totalheight"
22047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22050 This is a minipage.
22051 The text is set in an italic style.
22054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22057 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22058 another formatting.
22066 \begin_layout Standard
22067 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22070 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22074 as described in section
22075 \begin_inset space ~
22079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22081 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22086 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22092 \begin_layout Standard
22093 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22103 height_special "totalheight"
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22107 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22108 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22114 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22118 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22128 height_special "totalheight"
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22133 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22141 \begin_layout Standard
22142 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22148 \begin_layout Standard
22149 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22151 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22158 \begin_inset space ~
22166 \begin_layout Chapter
22167 Mathematical Formulas
22168 \begin_inset Index idx
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 \begin_inset Index idx
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22212 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22219 \begin_layout Standard
22220 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22225 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22228 \begin_layout Section
22230 \begin_inset Index idx
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 \begin_layout Standard
22243 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22250 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22252 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22253 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22254 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22256 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22262 \begin_layout Standard
22263 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22267 \begin_inset space ~
22272 , that appears when the cursor is in a formula.
22275 \begin_layout Standard
22276 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22277 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22280 \begin_layout Standard
22281 This is a line with an inline formula
22282 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22288 \begin_layout Standard
22289 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22290 paragraph, like this one:
22291 \begin_inset Formula
22298 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22301 \begin_layout Standard
22302 LyX supports also many LaTeX math commands.
22304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22308 \begin_inset space \space{}
22312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22325 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22326 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22330 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22333 \begin_inset space ~
22341 \begin_layout Subsection
22342 Navigating in Formulas
22343 \begin_inset Index idx
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 \begin_layout Standard
22356 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22357 achieved with the arrow keys.
22358 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22359 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22364 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22365 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22369 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22373 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22376 \end{array}\right]$
22384 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22389 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22390 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22393 \begin_layout Standard
22398 , printed in this document as
22399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22420 \begin_inset Note Note
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
22425 the space character (visible space).
22430 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22431 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22432 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22437 For example, if you want
22438 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 , since in the latter case only the
22495 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22500 will be under the square root sign:
22501 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22507 \begin_layout Standard
22508 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22510 \begin_inset Formula
22512 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22521 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22522 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22525 \begin_layout Subsection
22529 \begin_layout Standard
22530 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22531 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22535 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22536 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22537 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22538 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22539 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22542 \begin_layout Subsection
22543 Exponents and Subscripts
22544 \begin_inset Index idx
22547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 \begin_inset Index idx
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 \begin_layout Standard
22567 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22570 arg "math-superscript"
22576 arg "math-subscript"
22579 ), but the much easier way is to use a command.
22581 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22584 , type in a formula
22590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22606 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22612 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22616 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22637 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22646 , you have to use an extra
22650 to separate the hat and the character.
22652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22656 \begin_inset space \space{}
22660 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 Subscripts are similar: To get
22682 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 \begin_layout Subsection
22707 \begin_inset Index idx
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22719 \begin_layout Standard
22720 Create a fraction with either the command
22729 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22735 \begin_inset space ~
22741 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22742 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22743 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22748 To move back up, press
22753 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22754 \begin_inset Formula
22756 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22759 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22767 \begin_layout Subsection
22769 \begin_inset Index idx
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 \begin_layout Standard
22782 Roots can be created using the
22785 \begin_inset space ~
22793 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22799 arg "math-insert \\root"
22821 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22827 produces always a square root.
22830 \begin_layout Subsection
22831 Operators with Limits
22832 \begin_inset Index idx
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 \begin_inset Index idx
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22854 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22861 \begin_layout Standard
22863 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22867 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22870 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22871 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22872 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22873 The sum operator will automatically place its
22874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22881 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and on the side in inline
22884 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22888 \begin_inset Formula
22890 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22895 Integral signs, however, will place the limits on the side in both formula
22899 \begin_layout Standard
22900 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22902 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22903 behind the operator and hitting
22911 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22912 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22914 \begin_inset space ~
22918 \begin_inset space ~
22926 \begin_layout Standard
22927 Certain other mathematical expressions have this
22928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22935 feature as addition, such as
22936 \begin_inset Index idx
22939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22946 \begin_inset Formula
22948 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22953 which will place the
22954 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22966 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22967 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22973 \begin_layout Standard
22974 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22981 Have a look at section
22982 \begin_inset space ~
22986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22988 reference "sub:Functions"
22992 for an explanation of function macros.
22995 \begin_layout Subsection
22997 \begin_inset Index idx
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 \begin_layout Standard
23010 Most math symbols can be found in the
23013 \begin_inset space ~
23018 under one of several categories; including
23035 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23039 \begin_layout Standard
23040 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23041 you don't have to use the
23044 \begin_inset space ~
23049 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23050 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23053 \begin_layout Subsection
23055 \begin_inset Index idx
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23067 \begin_layout Standard
23068 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23073 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23079 \begin_inset space ~
23089 arg "math-insert \\space"
23095 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23096 For example, the sequence
23101 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23105 \begin_inset Graphics
23106 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23111 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23112 the space marker and hit space again several times.
23113 With every space hit the size will be changed.
23114 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23116 Here are two examples:
23119 \begin_layout Standard
23129 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23135 \begin_layout Standard
23145 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23151 \begin_layout Subsection
23153 \begin_inset Index idx
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23165 name "sub:Functions"
23172 \begin_layout Standard
23176 \begin_inset space ~
23181 contains under the button
23186 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23191 a number of function macros, such as
23192 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23196 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23204 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23211 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23212 avoid confusions, because
23213 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23217 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23223 \begin_layout Standard
23224 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23226 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23230 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23236 \begin_layout Standard
23237 For some mathematical objects, like the limes, the macro changes where subscript
23238 s are placed, as described in section
23239 \begin_inset space ~
23243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23245 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23252 \begin_layout Subsection
23254 \begin_inset Index idx
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 \begin_layout Standard
23267 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23269 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23270 You can also use LaTeX commands to e.
23271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23275 \begin_inset space \space{}
23279 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23282 even if your keyboard doesn't have hat-accents enabled.
23283 Our example is entered by typing
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 \begin_inset space ~
23308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23310 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23314 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23317 \begin_layout Standard
23318 \begin_inset Float table
23323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 \begin_inset Caption
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23329 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23333 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 \begin_inset Tabular
23344 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23345 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23347 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23594 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23648 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23702 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23756 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23930 \begin_layout Standard
23931 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23934 \begin_inset space ~
23942 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23945 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23949 \begin_layout Section
23950 Brackets and Delimiters
23951 \begin_inset Index idx
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 \begin_inset Index idx
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23973 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23980 \begin_layout Standard
23981 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23982 For some purposes, using just the keys
23987 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23988 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23989 toolbar delimiter icon
23992 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23996 For example, that is how you would construct the brackets around a matrix:
23997 \begin_inset Formula
23999 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24007 and to make it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24008 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24012 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24015 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24021 \begin_inset Formula
24023 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24031 \begin_layout Standard
24032 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24033 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24037 \begin_layout Standard
24038 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24039 left side and right side.
24040 If you use the option
24043 \begin_inset space ~
24048 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24049 The selection will be shown below the button field.
24050 If you want one side to not have a bracket, use the blank button.
24051 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24054 \begin_layout Standard
24055 If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root,
24056 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to
24057 go inside the brackets.
24058 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24063 The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure.
24064 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24065 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24066 For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select
24067 the structure and enter
24070 arg "math-delim ( )"
24076 \begin_layout Section
24077 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24078 \begin_inset Index idx
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 \begin_inset Index idx
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 \begin_inset Index idx
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24110 \begin_layout Standard
24111 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24114 \begin_inset space ~
24124 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24130 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24131 Here is an example:
24132 \begin_inset Formula
24134 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24143 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24144 \begin_inset space ~
24148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24150 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24155 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24156 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24157 This alignment is set in the box
24162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24210 for every column as default.
24211 For example, the sequence
24212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24223 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24224 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24225 corresponds to the relevant column.
24226 The result will look like this:
24227 \begin_inset Formula
24230 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24231 column & has & has\, right\\
24232 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24241 \begin_layout Standard
24242 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by hitting
24245 arg "newline-insert newline"
24248 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24249 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24251 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24254 or the math toolbar.
24257 \begin_layout Standard
24258 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24259 It can be created with the menu
24261 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24262 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24264 \begin_inset space ~
24276 Here is an example:
24277 \begin_inset Formula
24291 \begin_layout Standard
24292 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24295 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24298 arg "newline-insert newline"
24302 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24307 arg "newline-insert newline"
24310 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24318 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24319 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24320 A new row is created by every further hit of
24323 arg "newline-insert newline"
24327 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24328 Here is an example:
24329 \begin_inset Formula
24331 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24332 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24337 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24338 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24339 \begin_inset Formula
24341 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24349 \begin_layout Standard
24350 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24357 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24358 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24361 reference "eq:asquared"
24366 The other types are described in section
24367 \begin_inset space ~
24371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24373 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24380 \begin_layout Section
24381 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24382 \begin_inset Index idx
24385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24386 Math ! Formula numbering
24392 \begin_inset Index idx
24395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24396 Math ! Referencing formulas
24402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24404 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24411 \begin_layout Standard
24412 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24414 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24415 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24417 \begin_inset space ~
24425 arg "math-number-toggle"
24429 The formula number appears in LyX as
24430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24437 within parentheses.
24439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24446 denotes that the number will be calculated automatically when the output
24448 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24449 the document class.
24450 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24451 separated by a dot:
24452 \begin_inset Formula
24462 arg "math-number-toggle"
24465 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24466 You can only number displayed formulas.
24469 \begin_layout Standard
24470 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24472 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24473 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24475 \begin_inset space ~
24479 \begin_inset space ~
24483 \begin_inset space ~
24491 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24494 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24495 \begin_inset Formula
24498 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24504 To number all lines use the shortcut
24507 arg "math-number-toggle"
24513 \begin_layout Standard
24514 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24517 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24518 A label is inserted with the menu
24520 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24523 when the cursor is in the formula.
24524 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24525 It is recommended to use the proposed
24526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24537 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24538 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24539 We inserted in the following example the label
24540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24547 in the second line:
24548 \begin_inset Formula
24550 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24551 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24556 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24557 Therefore the label is shown in LyX at the place of the formula number
24559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24567 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24569 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24571 \begin_inset space ~
24577 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24578 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24579 as the formula number:
24582 \begin_layout Standard
24583 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24586 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24593 \begin_layout Standard
24594 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24595 \begin_inset space ~
24599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24601 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24606 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24614 \begin_layout Section
24615 User defined math macros
24616 \begin_inset Index idx
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24628 \begin_layout Standard
24629 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24630 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24631 Math macros are explained in section
24634 \begin_inset space ~
24646 \begin_layout Section
24650 \begin_layout Subsection
24652 \begin_inset Index idx
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24664 \begin_layout Standard
24665 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24666 To set a font in a formula, use the
24669 \begin_inset space ~
24679 arg "math-insert \\font"
24684 , or enter its command, listed in table
24685 \begin_inset space ~
24689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24691 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24698 \begin_layout Standard
24699 \begin_inset Float table
24704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24705 \begin_inset Caption
24707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24710 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24714 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24724 \begin_inset Tabular
24725 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24726 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24727 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24728 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24760 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24787 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24847 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24901 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24935 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24962 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 \begin_layout Standard
24997 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25005 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25021 \begin_layout Standard
25022 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25023 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25028 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25029 space when you need a space in the box.
25030 Here is an example where
25031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25042 denotes the set of numbers:
25043 \begin_inset Formula
25045 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25053 \begin_layout Standard
25054 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25060 \begin_inset space \space{}
25072 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25076 \begin_inset Newline newline
25079 So it is better not to use this feature.
25082 \begin_layout Standard
25083 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25084 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25088 \begin_inset Newline newline
25091 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25097 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25098 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25104 \begin_layout Standard
25111 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25114 \begin_layout Standard
25115 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25117 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25118 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25120 \begin_inset space ~
25128 \begin_layout Subsection
25130 \begin_inset Index idx
25133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 \begin_layout Standard
25143 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25145 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25149 \begin_inset space ~
25153 \begin_inset space ~
25161 \begin_inset space ~
25171 arg "math-insert \\font"
25183 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25184 You can use spaces and accents in math text like in normal text.
25185 Here is an example:
25186 \begin_inset Formula
25189 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25190 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25199 \begin_layout Subsection
25201 \begin_inset Index idx
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25213 \begin_layout Standard
25214 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25215 automatically chosen in most situations.
25233 For most characters,
25241 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25242 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25247 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25248 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25250 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25255 arg "math-insert \\style"
25261 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25262 For example, you can set
25263 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25266 , which is normally in
25275 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25279 The four styles are used in the following example:
25282 \begin_layout Standard
25283 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25287 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25291 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25295 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25301 \begin_layout Standard
25302 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25303 is set in a particular size with the menu
25305 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25307 \begin_inset space ~
25312 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25313 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25314 will be adjusted to correspond.
25315 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25326 \begin_layout Standard
25330 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25336 \begin_layout Section
25340 \begin_layout Standard
25341 As of LyX 1.6, support for theorem-like environments has been moved out of
25342 the document classes and into layout modules.
25343 \begin_inset Index idx
25346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 As a result, theorem-like environments can now easily be used with classes
25353 other than the AMS classes.
25355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25357 reference "sub:Modules"
25361 for more on layout modules.
25364 \begin_layout Section
25366 \begin_inset Index idx
25369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 \begin_inset Index idx
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 \begin_layout Standard
25389 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25390 (AMS) that are in common use.
25393 \begin_layout Subsection
25394 Enabling AMS-Support
25397 \begin_layout Standard
25398 Selecting the checkbox
25401 \begin_inset space ~
25405 \begin_inset space ~
25409 \begin_inset space ~
25416 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25420 \begin_inset Index idx
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25424 Document ! Settings
25432 \begin_inset space ~
25437 will include the AMS-packages in the document and make the facilities available.
25438 AMS is needed for many math-constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25439 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25442 \begin_layout Subsection
25444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25446 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25451 \begin_inset Index idx
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25455 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25463 \begin_layout Standard
25464 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25465 LyX allows you to choose between
25486 We refer to the AMS-documentation for an explanation of these formula types.
25489 \begin_layout Chapter
25493 \begin_layout Section
25495 \begin_inset Index idx
25498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25507 name "sec:Cross-References"
25514 \begin_layout Standard
25515 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25516 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25518 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25519 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25520 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25523 \begin_layout Enumerate
25527 \begin_layout Enumerate
25528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25530 name "enu:Second-item"
25537 \begin_layout Enumerate
25541 \begin_layout Standard
25542 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25544 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25547 or by pressing the toolbar button
25554 A gray label box like this:
25555 \begin_inset Graphics
25556 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25561 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25562 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25597 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted, e.
25598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25602 \begin_inset space \space{}
25605 if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix will
25607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25621 \begin_layout Standard
25622 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25624 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25627 or the toolbar button
25630 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25634 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25635 \begin_inset Graphics
25636 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25641 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25643 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25656 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25660 \begin_layout Standard
25663 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25666 , you can right-click on a label and use in the appearing context menu
25671 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25672 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25674 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25686 \begin_layout Standard
25687 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25688 \begin_inset space ~
25692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25694 reference "enu:Second-item"
25701 \begin_layout Standard
25702 It is recommended to use a protected space
25706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 described in section
25708 \begin_inset space ~
25712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25714 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25723 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25724 line breaks between them.
25727 \begin_layout Standard
25728 There are six formats of cross-references:
25731 \begin_layout Description
25732 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25735 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25742 \begin_layout Description
25743 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25744 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25756 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25763 \begin_layout Description
25764 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25765 \begin_inset space ~
25769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25770 LatexCommand pageref
25771 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25778 \begin_layout Description
25780 \begin_inset space ~
25784 \begin_inset space ~
25787 <page>: prints the text "on page" and the page number:
25788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25789 LatexCommand vpageref
25790 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25797 \begin_layout Description
25799 \begin_inset space ~
25803 \begin_inset space ~
25807 \begin_inset space ~
25810 <page>: prints the number, the text "on page", and the page number:
25811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25813 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25820 \begin_layout Description
25822 \begin_inset space ~
25825 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25826 \begin_inset Newline newline
25830 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25847 \begin_inset Index idx
25850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25851 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25857 \begin_inset Index idx
25860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25861 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25872 \begin_inset Newline newline
25875 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25878 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25882 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25883 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25891 is the default and preferred because
25895 supports only English documents.
25896 The format is specified by using the command
25908 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25909 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25922 ) can be done with this command
25923 \begin_inset Newline newline
25930 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25935 \begin_inset Newline newline
25938 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25940 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25942 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25949 \begin_layout Description
25951 \begin_inset space ~
25954 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25956 LatexCommand nameref
25957 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25964 \begin_layout Standard
25969 will not print the page number if the label is on the previous, the same,
25972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25976 \begin_inset space \space{}
25980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25994 <reference> on page <page>
25996 will not print anything about the page if the label is on the same page.
25999 \begin_layout Standard
26000 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26001 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26002 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26006 of the cross-reference window, that appear when you click on the cross-referenc
26010 \begin_layout Standard
26011 You can only use the style
26015 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26019 is always possible.
26022 \begin_layout Standard
26023 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26024 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26026 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26027 \begin_inset space ~
26031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26033 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26040 \begin_layout Standard
26041 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26045 \begin_inset space ~
26049 \begin_inset space ~
26054 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26055 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26058 \begin_inset space ~
26063 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26064 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26067 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26073 \begin_layout Standard
26074 You can change labels at any time.
26075 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26076 do not need to think about this.
26079 \begin_layout Standard
26080 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see two question
26081 marks in the output instead of the reference.
26084 \begin_layout Standard
26085 References are described in detail in sec.
26086 \begin_inset space ~
26090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26100 \begin_inset space ~
26108 \begin_layout Section
26109 Table of Contents and other Listings
26110 \begin_inset Index idx
26113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 \begin_inset Index idx
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26139 \begin_layout Subsection
26141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26143 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26150 \begin_layout Standard
26151 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26153 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26154 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26156 \begin_inset space ~
26160 \begin_inset space ~
26166 Is is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26167 If you click on it, the
26171 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26172 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26173 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26175 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26178 that is described in sec.
26179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26185 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26192 \begin_layout Standard
26193 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26194 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26196 \begin_inset space ~
26200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26202 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26206 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26208 \begin_inset space ~
26212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26214 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26218 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26220 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26223 \begin_layout Subsection
26224 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26227 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26234 \begin_layout Standard
26235 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26236 You can insert them via the
26238 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26240 \begin_inset space ~
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26250 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26253 \begin_layout Section
26254 URLs and Hyperlinks
26255 \begin_inset Index idx
26258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26265 \begin_inset Index idx
26268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 \begin_layout Subsection
26279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26288 \begin_layout Standard
26289 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26291 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26297 \begin_layout Standard
26298 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26299 \begin_inset Flex URL
26302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26312 \begin_layout Standard
26313 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26319 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26323 \begin_layout Standard
26324 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26332 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26340 \begin_layout Subsection
26342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26344 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26351 \begin_layout Standard
26352 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26354 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26357 or with the toolbar button
26364 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26373 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26374 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26375 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26377 name "LyX's homepage"
26378 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26382 , an Email address like this:
26383 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26385 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26386 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26391 , or a link to a file.
26394 \begin_layout Standard
26395 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26408 to the link target.
26411 \begin_layout Standard
26412 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26413 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26414 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26415 the text style dialog.
26416 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26420 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26422 name "LyX's homepage"
26423 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26430 \begin_layout Standard
26431 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26435 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26437 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26438 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26442 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26444 \begin_inset Newline newline
26452 \begin_inset Newline newline
26459 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26462 \begin_layout Section
26464 \begin_inset Index idx
26467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26476 name "sec:Appendices"
26483 \begin_layout Standard
26484 Appendices are created with the menu
26486 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26488 \begin_inset space ~
26492 \begin_inset space ~
26498 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26499 as the appendix region.
26500 The region is marked with a red borderline.
26503 \begin_layout Standard
26504 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix region is treated as an appendix,
26505 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26506 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26507 and the subsection number.
26508 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26512 \begin_layout Standard
26514 \begin_inset space ~
26518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26520 reference "chap:Credits"
26525 \begin_inset space ~
26529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26531 reference "sub:Export"
26538 \begin_layout Section
26540 \begin_inset Index idx
26543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26552 name "sec:Bibliography"
26559 \begin_layout Standard
26560 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26561 You can include a bibliography database,
26565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26566 Known under the name
26567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26579 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26580 manually, using the paragraph environment
26584 , which was described in section
26585 \begin_inset space ~
26589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26591 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26596 If you want anything other than numerical citations that are used in this
26597 document, like author-year citations, then you must
26601 use a bibliography database.
26604 \begin_layout Subsection
26605 The Bibliography Environment
26608 \begin_layout Standard
26613 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26615 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26624 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26626 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26635 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26638 \begin_layout Standard
26639 You can refer to the key of a bibliography entry using the menu
26641 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26644 or the toolbar button
26647 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26651 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26652 in which you can select one or more keys in the available key list.
26653 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key.
26654 When you click on the box, the citation window appears and you can change
26658 \begin_layout Standard
26659 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26660 entry with surrounding brackets.
26665 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26666 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26678 \begin_layout Standard
26681 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26686 key "latexcompanion"
26693 \begin_layout Standard
26694 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26695 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26704 \begin_layout Subsection
26705 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26706 \begin_inset Index idx
26709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26710 Bibliography ! Databases
26716 \begin_inset Index idx
26719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26720 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26728 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26735 \begin_layout Standard
26736 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26742 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26744 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26745 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26750 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26752 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26753 your working field in a database.
26754 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26755 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26756 list for that document.
26757 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26761 \begin_layout Standard
26762 The database is a text file with the file extension
26763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26774 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26775 The format is explained in
26776 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26782 and in LaTeX books (
26783 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26785 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26790 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26791 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26792 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26793 \begin_inset Flex URL
26796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26798 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26806 \begin_layout Standard
26807 To use a database, use the menu
26809 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26814 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26827 \begin_inset space ~
26833 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26834 In this window you can load one or more databases and a style file.
26837 Add bibliography to TOC
26839 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26844 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26845 in the document or just the cited references.
26848 \begin_layout Standard
26849 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26861 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26862 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26863 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26865 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26871 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26872 \begin_inset Newline newline
26876 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26878 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26890 \begin_layout Standard
26891 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26894 \begin_layout Standard
26895 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26896 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the processor
26897 either in the document settings under
26901 or in LyX's preferences under
26903 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26918 The following variants are possible:
26921 \begin_layout Description
26922 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, does not work with
26923 other bibliography packages (like e.
26924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26928 \begin_inset space ~
26935 ), only with the package
26939 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26943 \begin_layout Description
26944 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26945 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26946 with all bibliography packages, except of
26951 \begin_layout Description
26952 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in a 8-bit encoding,
26957 , works with all bibliography packages
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26961 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26963 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended to read the manual of
26969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 When you select the option
26981 Sectioned bibliography
26985 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26988 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26989 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26991 Customizing Bibliographies
26999 Additional Features
27004 \begin_layout Standard
27005 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27006 the two methods of creating them.
27007 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27008 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27009 We used the style file
27013 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27016 \begin_layout Subsection
27017 Bibliography layout
27018 \begin_inset Index idx
27021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27022 Bibliography ! Layout
27030 \begin_layout Standard
27031 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27032 For this feature you need to enable the option
27038 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27042 \begin_inset Index idx
27045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27046 Document ! Settings
27056 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27057 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27058 in the previous section.
27061 \begin_layout Standard
27062 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27063 the citation reference window.
27064 Here is an example where the text
27065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27069 \begin_inset space ~
27073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27076 appears after the reference:
27079 \begin_layout Standard
27081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27084 key "latexcompanion"
27091 \begin_layout Section
27093 \begin_inset Index idx
27096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27112 \begin_layout Standard
27113 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27115 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27117 \begin_inset space ~
27122 or the toolbar button
27129 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27130 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27131 by LyX as the index entry.
27134 \begin_layout Standard
27135 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27137 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27139 \begin_inset space ~
27143 \begin_inset space ~
27146 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27148 \begin_inset space ~
27154 A light blue box labeled
27155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27166 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27167 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27170 \begin_layout Standard
27171 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27172 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27176 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27183 \begin_layout Subsection
27184 Grouping Index Entries
27185 \begin_inset Index idx
27188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27197 \begin_layout Standard
27198 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27200 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27201 lists under the entry
27202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27210 First we create the entry
27211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27219 \begin_inset space ~
27223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27225 reference "sub:Lists"
27230 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27231 \begin_inset space ~
27235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27237 reference "sec:Itemize"
27241 , we insert the command
27244 \begin_layout Standard
27250 \begin_layout Standard
27254 \begin_layout Standard
27260 \begin_layout Standard
27261 for the enumerated list in section
27262 \begin_inset space ~
27266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27268 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27275 \begin_layout Standard
27276 The exclamation mark
27277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27284 marks the grouping levels.
27285 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27286 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27287 If we don't have an index entry for
27288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27295 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27298 \begin_layout Subsection
27300 \begin_inset Index idx
27303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27304 Index ! Page ranges
27312 \begin_layout Standard
27313 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27315 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27321 \begin_inset space \space{}
27324 if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create an index entry
27326 \begin_inset space ~
27330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27332 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27342 Paragraph environments|(
27345 \begin_layout Standard
27346 and another entry at the end of section
27347 \begin_inset space ~
27351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27353 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27363 Paragraph environments|)
27366 \begin_layout Standard
27368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27391 respectively start and end the index range.
27392 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27393 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27394 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27395 An example is the index entry
27396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27399 Document ! Settings
27400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27406 \begin_layout Subsection
27408 \begin_inset Index idx
27411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 Index ! Cross referencing
27420 \begin_layout Standard
27421 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27422 We referred for example in the index entry
27423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27431 \begin_inset space ~
27435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27437 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27441 ) to the index entry
27442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27449 in the same section using the entry
27452 \begin_layout Standard
27455 GIF|see{Image formats}
27458 \begin_layout Standard
27459 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27460 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27461 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27464 \begin_layout Subsection
27466 \begin_inset Index idx
27469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27470 Index ! Entry order
27478 \begin_layout Standard
27479 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27480 follow the rules for the index order.
27481 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27486 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27488 \begin_inset space ~
27492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27494 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27503 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27504 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27529 \begin_inset Index idx
27532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27533 Dummy entries ! maïs
27539 \begin_inset Index idx
27542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27543 Dummy entries ! maître
27549 \begin_inset Index idx
27552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27553 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27558 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27559 maïs, maison, maître.
27560 To achieve this, we use the command
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27566 previous entry@current entry
27569 \begin_layout Standard
27570 In our case we want to have
27571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27586 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27589 \begin_layout Standard
27595 \begin_layout Standard
27596 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27597 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27598 See the next subsection for an example.
27601 \begin_layout Standard
27602 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27608 \begin_layout Standard
27609 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27614 to generate the index (see sec.
27615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27621 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27630 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27638 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27642 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27643 index commands start with
27644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27656 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27661 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27664 \begin_layout Standard
27676 \begin_layout Standard
27688 \begin_layout Subsection
27690 \begin_inset Index idx
27693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27694 Index ! Entry layout
27702 \begin_layout Standard
27703 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27704 \begin_inset Index idx
27707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27710 This is an italic dummy entry
27715 You can also format the page number using the character
27716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27723 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27724 We can write for example
27727 \begin_layout Standard
27730 italic page number:|textit
27733 \begin_layout Standard
27734 to get the page number in italic.
27735 \begin_inset Index idx
27738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27739 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27744 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27762 \begin_inset space ~
27768 Have a look at section
27769 \begin_inset space ~
27773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27775 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27779 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27791 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27795 to generate the index, see sec.
27796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27802 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27811 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27816 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27817 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27820 key "latexcompanion"
27832 \begin_layout Standard
27833 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27835 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27836 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27837 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27838 If so, put the following in the preamble
27841 \begin_layout Standard
27853 \begin_layout Standard
27857 \begin_layout Standard
27863 \begin_layout Standard
27864 in the index entry.
27865 \begin_inset Index idx
27868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27869 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27874 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27875 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27876 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27879 \begin_layout Standard
27880 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27886 \begin_inset space \space{}
27889 we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get a bold font
27890 for all index entries.
27891 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27903 documentation for details,
27904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27906 key "makeindex,xindy"
27913 \begin_layout Subsection
27915 \begin_inset Index idx
27918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27927 name "sub:Index-Program"
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27935 If the index entry program
27939 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27943 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27952 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27953 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27954 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27955 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27956 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27966 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27967 dialog, see section
27968 \begin_inset space ~
27972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27974 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27979 The available options are listed and explained in
27980 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27982 key "makeindex,xindy"
27987 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27991 \begin_layout Standard
27992 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27993 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27996 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27997 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28001 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28002 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28005 \begin_layout Subsection
28009 \begin_layout Standard
28010 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28011 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28019 next to the standard index.
28020 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28021 that add this feature.
28027 \begin_inset Index idx
28030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28031 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28036 package to generate multiple indexes.
28037 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28038 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28046 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28047 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28048 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28051 \begin_layout Standard
28052 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28055 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28062 Use multiple Indexes
28063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28067 Note that the list of
28068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28075 below already contains the standard index.
28076 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28077 also appear as a heading) to the
28078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28085 input field and press the
28086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28094 The new index should now appear in the list as well.
28095 If you like, you can attribute an alternative label color to the new index
28096 by selecting the index in the list and hitting the
28097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28105 The label color may help you to differentiate between index entries of
28106 different indexes in the LyX work area.
28109 \begin_layout Standard
28110 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28113 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28115 \begin_inset space ~
28119 \begin_inset space ~
28128 menu has a separate index entry for each of the defined indexes.
28129 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28130 are some additional features:
28133 \begin_layout Itemize
28134 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28135 on the entry will open a dialog where you can do that.
28138 \begin_layout Itemize
28139 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28140 Furthermore, you can specify an index list to be a
28141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28149 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28154 g., if you use a book class, where the standard index heading is defined
28155 as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested
28156 to the non-subindexes.
28159 \begin_layout Section
28160 Nomenclature / Glossary
28161 \begin_inset Index idx
28164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28171 \begin_inset Index idx
28174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28205 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28212 \begin_layout Standard
28213 Sometimes you need to compile a list of symbols that are mentioned in your
28214 document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or
28218 \begin_layout Standard
28219 To be able to create nomenclatures, you need the LaTeX package
28224 \begin_inset Index idx
28227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28228 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28234 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28235 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28241 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28244 \begin_layout Standard
28245 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28246 and then use the menu
28248 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28254 \begin_inset space ~
28259 or the toolbar button
28262 arg "nomencl-insert"
28267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28278 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28281 \begin_layout Standard
28282 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28283 The first is the symbol that you want to refer to.
28284 The second is the description of the symbol.
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28288 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28296 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28304 \begin_layout Subsection
28305 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28306 \begin_inset Index idx
28309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28310 Nomenclature ! Layout
28318 \begin_layout Standard
28319 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28323 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28329 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28337 \begin_inset Newline newline
28345 \begin_inset Newline newline
28351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28358 character starts/ends the formula.
28359 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28371 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28381 \begin_layout Standard
28382 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28383 \begin_inset space ~
28387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28389 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28396 \begin_layout Standard
28400 \begin_inset space ~
28405 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28406 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28411 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28418 in this document is:
28419 \begin_inset Newline newline
28424 dummy entry for the character
28429 \begin_inset Newline newline
28441 \begin_inset space ~
28451 font use the command
28480 \begin_layout Subsection
28481 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28482 \begin_inset Index idx
28485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28486 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28494 \begin_layout Standard
28495 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28496 the symbol definition.
28497 This leads to undesired results when you for example have symbols in formulas.
28498 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28501 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28502 LatexCommand nomenclature
28504 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28511 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28515 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28516 LatexCommand nomenclature
28519 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28524 They will be sorted by
28525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28551 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28554 will be sorted before the
28558 since the character
28559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28566 is considered in sorting.
28569 \begin_layout Standard
28570 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28573 \begin_inset space ~
28578 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28579 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28581 For the example given, you can insert
28585 in this field for the
28586 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28593 will be located before
28594 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28600 \begin_layout Standard
28601 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28606 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28615 \begin_layout Subsection
28616 Nomenclature Options
28617 \begin_inset Index idx
28620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28621 Nomenclature ! Options
28629 \begin_layout Standard
28634 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28635 Here are some of its options, for more have a look at its documentation:
28638 \begin_layout Description
28639 refeq Appends the phrase
28640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28655 to every nomenclature entry, where
28661 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28664 \begin_layout Description
28665 refpage Appends the phrase
28666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28681 to every nomenclature entry, where
28687 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28690 \begin_layout Description
28691 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28694 \begin_layout Standard
28695 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28696 class options list in the
28698 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28702 In this document the options
28709 \begin_layout Standard
28710 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28716 \begin_layout Standard
28717 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28718 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28723 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28726 \begin_layout Description
28736 \begin_layout Description
28739 nomrefpage Like the
28746 \begin_layout Description
28749 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28758 \begin_layout Description
28762 \begin_inset space ~
28768 \begin_inset space ~
28773 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28776 \begin_layout Standard
28778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28785 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28786 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28789 \begin_layout Standard
28797 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28800 \begin_inset Newline newline
28807 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28812 \begin_inset Newline newline
28816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28831 by their translation.
28834 \begin_layout Subsection
28835 Printing the Nomenclature
28836 \begin_inset Index idx
28839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28840 Nomenclature ! Printing
28848 \begin_layout Standard
28849 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28851 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28853 \begin_inset space ~
28857 \begin_inset space ~
28860 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28876 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28877 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28878 You can choose between these settings:
28881 \begin_layout Description
28882 Default a space of 1
28883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28889 \begin_layout Description
28891 \begin_inset space ~
28895 \begin_inset space ~
28898 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28901 \begin_layout Description
28902 Custom custom space
28905 \begin_layout Standard
28906 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28915 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28923 For example, in order to change the name to
28927 , add the following line to the preamble:
28930 \begin_layout Standard
28938 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28941 \begin_layout Subsection
28942 Nomenclature Program
28943 \begin_inset Index idx
28946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28947 Nomenclature ! Program
28953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28955 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28962 \begin_layout Standard
28963 LyX uses the program
28967 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28968 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28973 by adding options, see section
28974 \begin_inset space ~
28978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28980 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28985 The available options are listed and explained in
28986 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28988 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28995 \begin_layout Section
28997 \begin_inset Index idx
29000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29007 \begin_inset Index idx
29010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29011 Document ! Branches
29017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29019 name "sec:Branches"
29026 \begin_layout Standard
29027 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29028 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29029 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29030 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29033 \begin_layout Standard
29034 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29035 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29036 To create a branch, either select the menu
29038 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29039 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29042 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29044 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29051 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29052 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29053 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29054 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29055 (see below for an example).
29056 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29057 to the name of the other) and to add
29058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29070 \begin_inset space ~
29073 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29074 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29077 \begin_layout Standard
29078 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29079 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29081 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29084 where you can choose a branch.
29085 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29089 \begin_layout Standard
29090 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29091 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29094 \begin_layout Standard
29095 \begin_inset Branch Question
29098 \begin_layout Standard
29099 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29108 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29111 \begin_layout Standard
29112 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29120 \begin_layout Standard
29127 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29128 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29131 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29132 Consider for example a file
29133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29140 which has the above branches.
29142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29149 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29173 branch were inactive,
29174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29189 branch was active, likewise
29190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29205 branch was active, and
29206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29209 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29213 if both branches were active.
29214 This helps you to easily export different versions of your document without
29218 \begin_layout Standard
29219 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29225 \begin_layout Standard
29226 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29227 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29229 For example you can define for the question branch
29233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29234 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29235 \begin_inset space ~
29239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29241 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29253 \begin_layout Standard
29263 \begin_layout Standard
29273 \begin_layout Standard
29274 and for the answer branch
29277 \begin_layout Standard
29287 \begin_layout Standard
29297 \begin_layout Standard
29298 \begin_inset Branch Question
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29333 \begin_layout Standard
29334 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29337 \begin_layout Standard
29341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29370 Now it is possible to use the commands
29374 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29381 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29384 to obtain conditional output.
29385 Here is an example formula where only the
29392 \begin_inset Formula
29394 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29402 \begin_layout Standard
29403 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29409 \change_inserted 5863208 1334492666
29413 \begin_layout Standard
29415 \change_inserted 5863208 1334493356
29416 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29418 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29419 For this advanced usage, please study Customization manual (in particular
29421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29424 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29433 \begin_layout Section
29435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29437 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29442 \begin_inset Index idx
29445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29459 dialog allows you in the
29463 to set up special options for the PDF output of your document.
29464 All options there are provided by the LaTeX-package
29469 \begin_inset Index idx
29472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29473 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29486 will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29487 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29488 table of contents entry or on a reference and he is shown the referenced
29490 You can specify in the dialog tab
29494 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29496 The backreferences will appear in the bibliography behind the different
29497 entries, showing the number of the section, slide, or page where the entry
29501 \begin_layout Standard
29506 you can set if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of your
29507 document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29508 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29510 With the open bookmarks level you can specify what sectioning level should
29511 be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
29513 \begin_inset space ~
29516 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29517 \begin_inset space ~
29520 1 will only display the sections.
29523 \begin_layout Standard
29524 The header information in the dialog tab
29528 are saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29529 Many programs are able to extract this information to e.
29530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29534 \begin_inset space \space{}
29537 automatically recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29538 This is very useful to sort, classify, or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29541 Automatic fill header
29543 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29544 title and author settings.
29547 \begin_layout Standard
29550 Load in fullscreen mode
29552 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29555 \begin_layout Standard
29556 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29557 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29563 For an explanation of them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29564 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29573 \begin_layout Section
29574 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29577 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29584 \begin_layout Subsection
29586 \begin_inset Index idx
29589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29598 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29605 \begin_layout Standard
29606 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29607 constructs, but not all.
29608 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29609 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29610 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29611 is for every problem a LaTeX-package.
29612 But LyX can of course not be up to date and support all packages and their
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29617 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29619 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29621 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29623 \begin_inset space ~
29628 or by the toolbar button
29641 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29649 \begin_layout Standard
29650 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29651 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29652 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29653 using the LaTeX-command
29659 , you can write the command part
29665 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29669 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29670 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29671 the following example:
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 \begin_inset Graphics
29676 filename clipart/ERT.png
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29688 \begin_layout Standard
29689 This is a line with a
29693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29717 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29725 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29726 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29734 \begin_layout Subsection
29735 Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29736 \begin_inset Argument
29739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29746 \begin_inset Index idx
29749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29758 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29765 \begin_layout Standard
29766 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29767 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29768 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29777 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29778 any time if you know the right commands.
29780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29784 \begin_inset space \space{}
29787 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the
29789 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29790 all caption labels bold.
29791 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29793 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29797 \begin_layout Standard
29798 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29799 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29800 First you have to find out which and therefore look into the LaTeX package
29802 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29812 As result you find that the package
29817 \begin_inset Index idx
29820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29821 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29827 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29829 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29835 \begin_layout Standard
29840 usepackage[options]{package name}
29843 \begin_layout Standard
29844 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29845 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29846 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29849 \begin_layout Standard
29850 In your case the package name is
29855 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29860 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29861 So you add the command
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29869 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29872 \begin_layout Standard
29873 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29878 For more commands provided by the
29882 package, have a look at its documentation,
29883 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29897 \begin_layout Standard
29898 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29900 For example if you use a
29904 class, you don't need the package
29908 , you can instead write
29911 \begin_layout Standard
29916 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29921 \begin_layout Standard
29922 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29923 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29924 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29931 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29934 \begin_layout Standard
29935 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29936 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29938 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29939 the previous section.
29942 \begin_layout Standard
29943 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29945 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29947 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29954 \begin_layout Standard
29955 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29961 \begin_layout Standard
29965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29975 \begin_inset Note Note
29978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29979 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29987 \begin_layout Left Header
29988 \begin_inset Argument
29991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30011 \begin_inset Note Note
30014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30015 defines the header line as described below
30023 \begin_layout Center Header
30024 \begin_inset Argument
30027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30036 \begin_layout Right Header
30037 \begin_inset Argument
30040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30061 \begin_layout Left Footer
30062 \begin_inset Argument
30065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30086 \begin_layout Center Footer
30087 \begin_inset Argument
30090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30101 \begin_inset Newline newline
30105 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30111 \begin_layout Right Footer
30112 \begin_inset Argument
30115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30137 \begin_layout Section
30138 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30141 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30146 \begin_inset Index idx
30149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30150 Document ! Header/Footer line
30156 \begin_inset Index idx
30159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 \begin_layout Standard
30169 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30170 to set the headings style to
30176 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30182 \begin_inset space ~
30188 As a second step add in the menu
30190 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30191 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30198 Custom Header/Footerlines
30199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30203 This module offers the following 6
30204 \begin_inset space ~
30210 \begin_layout Description
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30216 \begin_inset space ~
30220 \begin_inset space ~
30224 \begin_inset space ~
30228 \begin_inset space ~
30234 \begin_layout Description
30236 \begin_inset space ~
30240 \begin_inset space ~
30244 \begin_inset space ~
30248 \begin_inset space ~
30252 \begin_inset space ~
30258 \begin_layout Standard
30259 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30262 \begin_layout Standard
30263 Normally, headers and footers are set up in the beginning of the document.
30264 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30266 \begin_inset space ~
30270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30272 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30276 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30279 \begin_layout Standard
30280 \begin_inset Float figure
30286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 \begin_inset Tabular
30290 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30291 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30292 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30293 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30294 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30296 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30314 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30325 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30343 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30354 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30358 The normal text on the page goes here.
30359 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30361 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30362 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30367 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30376 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30387 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30405 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30434 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30452 \begin_inset Caption
30454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30457 name "fig:Page-layout"
30461 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30474 \begin_layout Subsection
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30479 To define your header line, add all 3
30480 \begin_inset space ~
30484 The things you add to the styles appear on uneven pages, the things in
30485 the optional arguments on even pages.
30486 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30488 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30489 Defining the footer line works similar.
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30493 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30496 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30509 \begin_inset space ~
30517 \begin_layout Description
30520 thepage prints the current page number
30523 \begin_layout Description
30526 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30529 \begin_layout Description
30532 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30535 \begin_layout Description
30538 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30539 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30546 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30549 because it usually goes in a left header.
30552 \begin_layout Description
30555 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30556 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30558 It is normally used in the right header.
30561 \begin_layout Subsection
30562 Default header/footer
30565 \begin_layout Standard
30566 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30567 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30568 footer has the page number.
30569 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30570 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30571 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30574 \begin_inset space ~
30582 \begin_layout Subsection
30586 \begin_layout Standard
30587 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30588 Some pages are different.
30589 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30590 a new part or chapter in your book.
30591 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30592 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30593 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30596 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30597 Header and footer decoration line
30600 \begin_layout Standard
30601 By default, you get a 0.4
30602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30605 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30606 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30618 in the following scheme:
30621 \begin_layout Standard
30628 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30632 Where thickness is a size in standard units like
30641 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30648 \begin_layout Standard
30649 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30650 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30651 \begin_inset space ~
30655 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30665 Several header/footer lines
30668 \begin_layout Standard
30669 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30670 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30671 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30673 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30685 in this scheme in your document preamble:
30688 \begin_layout Standard
30695 headheight}{height}
30698 \begin_layout Standard
30699 Where height is a size in standard units.
30700 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30701 your header/footer and preview your document as PDF.
30702 Then open the LaTeX logfile via the menu
30704 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30718 and look via the button
30721 \begin_inset space ~
30726 if you find a warning of the package
30731 \begin_inset Index idx
30734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30735 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30741 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30742 for your header/footer.
30745 \begin_layout Subsection
30749 \begin_layout Standard
30750 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30751 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30752 This example consists of the following definition:
30755 \begin_layout Description
30757 \begin_inset space ~
30766 , empty optional argument
30769 \begin_layout Description
30771 \begin_inset space ~
30774 Header empty, empty optional argument
30777 \begin_layout Description
30779 \begin_inset space ~
30788 in the optional argument
30791 \begin_layout Description
30793 \begin_inset space ~
30802 in the optional argument
30805 \begin_layout Description
30807 \begin_inset space ~
30819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30823 \begin_inset Newline newline
30827 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30834 in the optional argument
30837 \begin_layout Description
30839 \begin_inset space ~
30848 , empty optional argument
30851 \begin_layout Description
30854 headrulewidth set to 2
30855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30861 \begin_layout Standard
30862 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30863 For more special things like e.
30864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30868 \begin_inset space ~
30871 thumb-indexes, see the manual of the
30876 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30885 \begin_layout Standard
30886 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30892 \begin_layout Standard
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30900 pagestyle{headings}
30906 \begin_inset Note Note
30909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30910 switches back to page style with the default headings
30918 \begin_layout Section
30919 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30922 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30927 \begin_inset Index idx
30930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30937 \begin_inset Index idx
30940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30949 \begin_layout Standard
30950 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
30951 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30952 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30955 \begin_layout Subsection
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30960 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
30965 \begin_inset Index idx
30968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30969 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
30974 (on some systems named simply
30979 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
30981 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30987 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
30988 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30996 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
30997 automatically installed together with LyX.
31000 \begin_layout Subsection
31004 \begin_layout Standard
31005 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31006 LaTeX, activate the option
31009 \begin_inset space ~
31016 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31022 \begin_inset space ~
31026 \begin_inset space ~
31029 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31036 \begin_inset space ~
31049 \begin_inset space ~
31054 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31057 \begin_layout Standard
31058 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31062 \begin_layout Standard
31063 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31071 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31072 generated by activating the option
31075 \begin_inset space ~
31081 Reopening the documents will fix such problems.
31089 \begin_layout Subsection
31090 Selected document parts
31093 \begin_layout Standard
31094 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31095 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31096 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31097 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31099 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31103 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31104 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31105 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31108 \begin_layout Standard
31109 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31115 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 is explained in section
31128 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31133 \begin_inset space ~
31143 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31144 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31146 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31148 Here is the result:
31151 \begin_layout Standard
31152 \begin_inset Preview
31154 \begin_layout Standard
31159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31163 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31169 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31179 height_special "totalheight"
31182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31207 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31213 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31235 \begin_layout Standard
31236 Previewing works also for colors.
31237 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31255 is explained in section
31262 \begin_inset space ~
31275 \begin_layout Standard
31276 \begin_inset Preview
31278 \begin_layout Standard
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31301 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31306 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31325 \begin_layout Standard
31326 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31332 \begin_layout Standard
31333 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31334 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31335 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31337 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31338 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31339 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31340 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31344 \begin_layout Subsection
31348 \begin_layout Standard
31349 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31352 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31354 \begin_inset space ~
31359 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31360 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph where the cursor is
31362 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31363 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31364 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31365 the source view window.
31368 \begin_layout Section
31369 Advanced Find and Replace
31370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31372 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31377 \begin_inset Index idx
31380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31387 \begin_inset Index idx
31390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31399 \begin_layout Subsection
31403 \begin_layout Standard
31404 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31405 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31406 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31407 The key-features are:
31410 \begin_layout Itemize
31411 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31412 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31413 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31417 \begin_layout Itemize
31418 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31419 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31420 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31421 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31424 \begin_layout Itemize
31425 Search may be widened to a specific
31430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31434 \begin_inset space ~
31437 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31438 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31445 \begin_layout Itemize
31446 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31447 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31452 \begin_inset space ~
31455 all lowercase, all uppercase, first uppercase followed by lowercase)
31458 \begin_layout Subsection
31462 \begin_layout Standard
31463 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31465 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31478 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31481 ) or the toolbar button
31484 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31490 Advanced Find and Replace
31495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31499 \begin_layout Standard
31504 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31509 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31514 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31515 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31516 Pressing repeatedly
31520 keeps searching forward.
31521 Similarly, pressing
31525 searches for the entered text backwards.
31528 \begin_layout Standard
31529 While searching, the
31533 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31543 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31547 Searching for mathematics
31550 \begin_layout Standard
31551 Mathematical formulas may be searched for by typing in the
31555 editor a mathematical formula, such as
31556 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31559 or also something more complex like
31560 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31564 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31565 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas, for example
31566 the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31567 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31573 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31577 \begin_layout Standard
31578 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31579 This is done by switching to the
31583 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31588 This way, entering in the
31595 \begin_layout Itemize
31596 a plain word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring
31597 in emphasized or boldface.
31600 \begin_layout Itemize
31601 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31602 instances with same face only, and within the same text style only.
31603 Note that, for example, an emphasized text is found not only when occurring
31604 alone, but also when it is contained in a longer emphasized sentence.
31607 \begin_layout Itemize
31608 a plain word in a section heading, and searching for it, finds occurrences
31609 of if only within section headings.
31610 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31611 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31615 \begin_layout Itemize
31616 some mathematics in a displayed formula will only find instances of this
31617 formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31624 \begin_layout Standard
31625 The text segments matching the text entered in the
31629 editor may be replaced with the text segments entered in the
31637 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31641 button or alternatively
31663 \begin_layout Standard
31664 You can replace full-featured formatted LyX segments in place of the matching
31665 text segments in your document.
31666 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability may be (just to mention
31670 \begin_layout Itemize
31671 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31672 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31680 with its typewriter version
31683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31693 \begin_layout Itemize
31694 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31700 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31712 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31719 (you may want to enable the
31727 options and disable the
31735 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31743 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31744 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31748 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31751 , or occurrences of
31752 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31756 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31762 \begin_layout Subsection
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31767 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31772 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31776 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31785 You can search for regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31791 This is done via the menu
31793 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31794 Insert Regular Expression
31796 while the cursor is in the
31801 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31802 expression matching rules
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31807 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31813 \begin_inset space ~
31816 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31817 to match expressions.
31822 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31823 same text in the document.
31824 Note that it is allowed to cut and paste regexp-mode insets as usual.
31825 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31828 \begin_layout Enumerate
31829 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31834 editor the fraction
31835 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31839 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31842 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31843 fractions with the given denominator.
31846 \begin_layout Enumerate
31847 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31859 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31864 regular expression and adding for it an emphasized or bold face, finds
31865 all emphasized and bold face text, respectively.
31867 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31870 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31871 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31875 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual,
31876 enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31877 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31880 , and referring back to them through
31881 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31885 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31889 For example, try searching for the regexp
31890 \begin_inset Formula $([a-z]+)[[:blank:]]\backslash1$
31893 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31896 \begin_layout Standard
31897 Note that back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
31898 and when occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of
31899 back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute, i.
31900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31904 \begin_inset space ~
31908 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31911 always refers to the first occurrence of
31912 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31915 in all entered regexps.
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31919 Note also that the use of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
31923 \begin_layout Section
31925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31927 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31932 \begin_inset Index idx
31935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 \begin_layout Standard
31945 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
31948 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31955 or the toolbar button
31958 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31961 starts the spell checking beginning from the current cursor position.
31962 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31963 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31964 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31965 scrolled so that it is visible.
31966 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31967 n, if any could be found.
31968 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
31972 field, double-click directly invokes the replacement.
31973 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31976 \begin_layout Standard
31977 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31980 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31984 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31985 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31986 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31987 This work if you have marked the different languages appropriately and
31988 have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31989 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31992 \begin_layout Subsection
31996 \begin_layout Standard
31997 In LyX's preferences dialog under
32000 \begin_inset space ~
32003 Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32006 you can set the following things:
32009 \begin_layout Description
32011 \begin_inset space ~
32014 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32015 Depending on your platform,
32029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32030 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32031 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32046 \begin_layout Description
32048 \begin_inset space ~
32051 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32052 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32055 \begin_layout Description
32057 \begin_inset space ~
32060 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32066 \begin_inset space \space{}
32070 This should normally not be needed.
32073 \begin_layout Description
32075 \begin_inset space ~
32079 \begin_inset space ~
32082 words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32094 \begin_layout Description
32096 \begin_inset space ~
32099 continuously Check the spelling of your document as you type it.
32100 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32101 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32102 appear in the context menu.
32103 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32107 \begin_layout Description
32109 \begin_inset space ~
32113 \begin_inset space ~
32117 \begin_inset space ~
32120 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked
32124 \begin_layout Section
32126 \begin_inset Index idx
32129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32138 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32145 \begin_layout Standard
32146 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32147 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32159 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32168 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32169 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
32170 are available for many languages.
32173 \begin_layout Standard
32174 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32178 \begin_layout Subsection
32179 Setting up the thesaurus
32182 \begin_layout Standard
32190 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32195 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32200 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32206 en_EN for English).
32207 For instance, the English files are named:
32210 \begin_layout Itemize
32214 \begin_layout Itemize
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed, these
32220 files should be already on your system.
32221 If not, you can get dictionaries either from
32222 \begin_inset Flex URL
32225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32227 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/dictionaries/trunk/thes
32233 \begin_inset Flex URL
32236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32238 http://extensions.services.openoffice.org/en/search/node/thesaurus
32247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32248 Note that, as of OpenOffice
32249 \begin_inset space ~
32253 \begin_inset Flex URL
32256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32258 http://extensions.services.openoffice.org
32263 are usually packed in extension archives (
32267 ) that contain other files such as spellchecker dictionaries besides the
32269 These archives are simple zip files, so you can unpack them as you would
32270 unpack a zip archive.
32283 files of all languages you want to use into one directory (do not use subfolder
32284 s), and specify the path to this directory in
32286 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32287 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32291 Now the thesaurus should be ready to use.
32294 \begin_layout Subsection
32295 Using the thesaurus
32298 \begin_layout Standard
32299 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32301 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32304 or the toolbar button
32307 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32310 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32312 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32314 The proposals are grouped into categories.
32315 Note that the thesaurus does not only show synonyms, but also hyperonyms
32316 and hyponyms (such as
32324 ), compounds (such as
32328 ) and antonyms (such as
32336 ), which are marked as such.
32339 \begin_layout Standard
32340 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32341 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32345 \begin_layout Standard
32346 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32347 the dictionary, such as the above
32351 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32356 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32357 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32358 For example looking up the word forms
32366 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32371 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e.
32372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32384 s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and
32385 also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted
32386 part will be replaced, thus the ending remains).
32389 \begin_layout Section
32391 \begin_inset Index idx
32394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32401 \begin_inset Index idx
32404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32405 Document ! Change Tracking
32411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32413 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32420 \begin_layout Standard
32421 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32422 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32423 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32424 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32426 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32428 \begin_inset space ~
32431 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32433 \begin_inset space ~
32441 \begin_layout Standard
32442 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32456 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32457 You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under
32460 \begin_inset space ~
32464 \begin_inset space ~
32474 \begin_inset Index idx
32477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32478 Color ! Change tracking
32483 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32484 the cursor is in changed text.
32485 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32488 arg "changes-merge"
32494 \begin_layout Standard
32495 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32496 \begin_inset Index idx
32499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32508 \begin_layout Standard
32509 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32515 \begin_layout Standard
32516 \begin_inset Graphics
32517 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32525 \begin_layout Standard
32526 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32532 \begin_layout Standard
32533 The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
32537 \begin_layout Standard
32538 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32545 \begin_inset Tabular
32546 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32547 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32548 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32549 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32559 arg "changes-track"
32567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32573 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32575 \begin_inset space ~
32578 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32580 \begin_inset space ~
32589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32598 arg "changes-output"
32606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32612 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32614 \begin_inset space ~
32617 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32619 \begin_inset space ~
32623 \begin_inset space ~
32627 \begin_inset space ~
32636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32657 Jumps to the next change
32663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32672 arg "change-accept"
32680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32686 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32688 \begin_inset space ~
32691 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32693 \begin_inset space ~
32702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32711 arg "change-reject"
32719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32725 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32727 \begin_inset space ~
32730 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32732 \begin_inset space ~
32741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32750 arg "changes-merge"
32758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32764 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32766 \begin_inset space ~
32769 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32771 \begin_inset space ~
32780 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32789 arg "all-changes-accept"
32797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32803 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32805 \begin_inset space ~
32808 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32810 \begin_inset space ~
32814 \begin_inset space ~
32823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32832 arg "all-changes-reject"
32840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32846 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32848 \begin_inset space ~
32851 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32853 \begin_inset space ~
32857 \begin_inset space ~
32866 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32889 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32890 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32892 \begin_inset space ~
32901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32924 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32926 \begin_inset space ~
32942 \begin_layout Standard
32943 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32949 \begin_layout Standard
32950 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
32951 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
32952 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
32953 the next change after the current cursor position.
32954 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
32955 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
32956 step to the next change.
32957 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
32960 \begin_layout Standard
32961 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
32962 to describe a change.
32965 \begin_layout Standard
32966 To show the made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package
32971 \begin_inset Index idx
32974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32975 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
32981 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
32982 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32988 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
32991 \begin_layout Section
32992 Comparison of Documents
32993 \begin_inset Index idx
32996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32997 Comparison of documents
33005 \begin_layout Standard
33006 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33008 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33012 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33014 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33015 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33023 \begin_inset space ~
33027 \begin_inset space ~
33036 \begin_inset space ~
33040 \begin_inset space ~
33044 \begin_inset space ~
33048 \begin_inset space ~
33052 \begin_inset space ~
33056 \begin_inset space ~
33061 enables the change tracking option
33064 \begin_inset space ~
33068 \begin_inset space ~
33072 \begin_inset space ~
33077 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33080 \begin_layout Section
33081 International Support
33082 \begin_inset Index idx
33085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33086 International support
33094 \begin_layout Standard
33095 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33096 For some non-western languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain
33097 how to set up LyX to use them:
33098 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33100 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew"
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33108 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33109 \begin_inset space ~
33113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33115 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33122 \begin_layout Subsection
33124 \begin_inset Index idx
33127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33134 \begin_inset Index idx
33137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33138 Document ! Settings
33144 \begin_inset Index idx
33147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33148 Document ! Language
33156 \begin_layout Standard
33159 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33162 dialog lets you set
33164 the language and character encoding for your language.
33168 \begin_layout Standard
33169 Choose your language in the
33173 section of this dialog.
33181 \begin_layout Standard
33186 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33191 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33192 For details about the different encoding options see section
33193 \begin_inset space ~
33197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33199 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
33206 \begin_layout Subsection
33207 Keyboard mapping configuration
33208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33210 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33217 \begin_layout Standard
33218 If you have for example a U.
33219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33222 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33223 can use an alternate keymap.
33224 For example, if you have a U.
33225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33228 S.-style keyboard but want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33229 use an Italian keymap.
33230 The preferences dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
33232 \begin_inset space ~
33236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33238 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33243 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33244 which one you want to use.
33247 \begin_layout Standard
33248 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33249 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33250 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.S.
33251 keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33252 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33253 one to support the characters you want.
33254 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33261 \begin_layout Subsection
33265 \begin_layout Standard
33267 \begin_inset space ~
33271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33273 reference "tab:The-latin1-character"
33282 You should be able to enter the characters in the first eight columns directly
33286 \begin_layout Standard
33287 There are a few things you need to know about this table.
33288 Here are some of the details you will need to bear in mind when using character
33296 \begin_layout Itemize
33297 Even if you have selected
33303 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33306 dialog, users who have only the
33310 -fonts for LaTeX [or who have the
33314 -fonts but aren't using them] will still miss a few characters: D0, F0,
33315 DE, FE, AB, and BB – the uppercase and lowercase eth and thorn, and the
33316 french quotes will not show up.
33319 \begin_layout Standard
33320 \begin_inset Float table
33325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33326 \begin_inset Caption
33328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33331 name "tab:The-latin1-character"
33347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33349 \begin_inset Tabular
33350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="17" columns="17">
33351 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
33352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33356 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33357 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33358 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33359 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33360 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33361 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33362 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33363 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33364 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33365 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33366 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
33370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37781 \begin_layout Standard
37782 The following is a full list of all of the accented characters LyX can display
37784 It includes not only the accented characters from the previous table, but
37785 also the characters from
37797 \begin_layout Itemize
37806 \begin_layout Standard
37807 ¨ Ä Ë Ï Ö Ü ä ë ï ö ü ÿ
37808 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37814 \begin_layout Standard
37815 ^ Â Ê Î Ô Û â ê î ô û
37816 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37822 \begin_layout Standard
37823 ` À È Ì Ò Ù à è ì ò ù
37824 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37830 \begin_layout Standard
37831 ´ Á É Í Ó Ú Ý á é í ó ú ý
37832 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37840 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37846 \begin_layout Standard
37848 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37854 \begin_layout Standard
37856 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37863 \begin_layout Itemize
37876 \begin_layout Standard
37878 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37884 \begin_layout Standard
37886 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37894 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37900 \begin_layout Standard
37902 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37908 \begin_layout Standard
37910 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37916 \begin_layout Standard
37918 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37925 \begin_layout Standard
37926 All the characters above are actively supported by TeX fonts.
37927 In addition TeX allows diacritical marks on almost all characters.
37928 Also make sure you're using the
37935 \begin_layout Chapter
37938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37940 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37947 \begin_layout Standard
37948 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37949 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37950 topic inside the user's guide.
37953 \begin_layout Section
37955 \begin_inset Index idx
37958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37972 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37975 \begin_layout Subsection
37979 \begin_layout Standard
37980 Creates a new document.
37983 \begin_layout Subsection
37987 \begin_layout Standard
37988 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37989 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37990 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37993 \begin_layout Subsection
37997 \begin_layout Standard
38001 \begin_layout Subsection
38005 \begin_layout Standard
38006 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38007 Click there on a file to open it.
38010 \begin_layout Subsection
38014 \begin_layout Standard
38015 Closes the current document.
38018 \begin_layout Subsection
38022 \begin_layout Standard
38023 Closes all opened documents.
38026 \begin_layout Subsection
38030 \begin_layout Standard
38031 Saves the actual document.
38034 \begin_layout Subsection
38038 \begin_layout Standard
38039 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38042 \begin_layout Subsection
38046 \begin_layout Standard
38047 Saves all opened documents.
38050 \begin_layout Subsection
38054 \begin_layout Standard
38055 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38058 \begin_layout Subsection
38062 \begin_layout Standard
38063 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38064 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38065 It is described in the section
38067 Version Control in LyX
38071 Additional Features
38076 \begin_layout Subsection
38080 \begin_layout Standard
38081 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
38082 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
38084 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
38087 \begin_layout Standard
38088 When using the menu entry
38091 \begin_inset space ~
38096 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38109 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38110 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38113 \begin_layout Subsection
38115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38124 \begin_layout Standard
38125 You can export your document to various file formats.
38126 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
38127 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38128 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
38131 \begin_layout Standard
38132 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38134 \begin_inset space ~
38138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38140 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
38147 \begin_layout Description
38153 \begin_inset space ~
38160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38167 yX format of the special LyX
38168 \begin_inset space ~
38171 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38172 \begin_inset Newline newline
38175 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX.
38178 \begin_layout Description
38179 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38185 \begin_layout Description
38187 \begin_inset space ~
38190 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38196 \begin_layout Description
38197 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
38198 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38199 files paths or file names in your document.
38200 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38207 \begin_layout Description
38208 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38209 in files paths or file names
38212 \begin_layout Description
38214 \begin_inset space ~
38221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38228 eX) DVI-format using the program
38232 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
38235 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38243 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38251 \begin_layout Description
38253 \begin_inset space ~
38256 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38260 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38265 \begin_layout Description
38266 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
38270 \begin_layout Description
38272 \begin_inset space ~
38276 \begin_inset space ~
38279 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38283 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38291 \begin_layout Description
38298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38330 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
38335 \begin_layout Description
38342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38355 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
38356 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38360 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38363 \begin_layout Description
38370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38378 \begin_inset space ~
38383 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
38384 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
38392 \begin_layout Description
38399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38407 \begin_inset space ~
38418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38431 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
38436 \begin_layout Description
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38442 \begin_inset space ~
38451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38460 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
38461 music notation software
38466 \begin_layout Description
38473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38483 \begin_inset space ~
38487 \begin_inset space ~
38490 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38491 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38492 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
38495 \begin_layout Description
38502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38512 \begin_inset space ~
38515 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
38516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38531 represent the version number)
38534 \begin_layout Description
38541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
38553 \begin_layout Description
38554 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38559 \begin_layout Description
38560 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
38562 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38565 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
38569 \begin_layout Description
38573 \begin_inset space ~
38578 PDF-format using the program
38582 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38585 \begin_layout Description
38589 \begin_inset space ~
38596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38605 PDF-format using the program
38609 , produces PDF-files directly
38612 \begin_layout Description
38616 \begin_inset space ~
38621 PDF-format using the program
38625 , produces PDF-files directly
38628 \begin_layout Description
38632 \begin_inset space ~
38637 PDF-format using the program
38641 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38644 \begin_layout Description
38648 \begin_inset space ~
38655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38664 PDF-format using the program
38668 , produces PDF-files directly
38671 \begin_layout Description
38675 \begin_inset space ~
38683 \begin_layout Description
38687 \begin_inset space ~
38691 \begin_inset space ~
38696 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38697 and then exported as text using the program
38702 \begin_layout Description
38707 PostScript format using the program
38712 \begin_layout Description
38713 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
38714 programming language
38727 it is possible to use
38734 \begin_layout Standard
38735 If one of the menu entries
38742 \begin_inset space ~
38751 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
38752 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
38753 \begin_inset space ~
38757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38759 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38764 \begin_inset Index idx
38767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38768 Reconfiguration of LyX
38776 \begin_layout Subsection
38780 \begin_layout Standard
38781 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
38782 format or send it to a printer.
38783 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
38784 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
38790 For more information have a look at section
38791 \begin_inset space ~
38795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38797 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
38804 \begin_layout Subsection
38808 \begin_layout Standard
38809 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38810 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
38811 prefix, see section
38812 \begin_inset space ~
38816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38818 reference "sec:Paths"
38823 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38832 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38833 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38840 reference "sub:Converters"
38847 \begin_layout Subsection
38848 New and Close Window
38851 \begin_layout Standard
38852 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
38855 \begin_layout Subsection
38859 \begin_layout Standard
38860 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38863 \begin_layout Section
38865 \begin_inset Index idx
38868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38877 \begin_layout Subsection
38881 \begin_layout Standard
38882 Described in section
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38889 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38896 \begin_layout Subsection
38897 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38900 \begin_layout Standard
38901 Described in section
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38908 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38915 \begin_layout Subsection
38919 \begin_layout Standard
38920 Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in.
38921 If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38924 \begin_layout Subsection
38928 \begin_layout Standard
38929 Selects the whole document.
38932 \begin_layout Subsection
38933 Find & Replace (Quick)
38936 \begin_layout Standard
38937 Described in section
38938 \begin_inset space ~
38942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38944 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38951 \begin_layout Subsection
38952 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38955 \begin_layout Standard
38956 Described in section
38957 \begin_inset space ~
38961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38963 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38970 \begin_layout Subsection
38971 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38974 \begin_layout Standard
38975 This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph
38979 \begin_layout Subsection
38983 \begin_layout Standard
38984 Described in section
38985 \begin_inset space ~
38989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38991 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38998 \begin_layout Subsection
39000 \begin_inset Index idx
39003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39004 Paragraph ! Settings
39012 \begin_layout Standard
39013 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39014 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39018 \begin_layout Standard
39019 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39020 have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the
39022 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39036 \begin_layout Subsection
39037 Table Settings and Math
39040 \begin_layout Standard
39041 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
39043 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
39044 The properties of tables are described in section
39045 \begin_inset space ~
39049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39051 reference "sec:Tables"
39055 , the properties of formulas in chapter
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39062 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39069 \begin_layout Subsection
39070 Increase / Decrease List Depth
39073 \begin_layout Standard
39074 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
39076 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39077 \begin_inset space ~
39081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39083 reference "sec:Nesting"
39088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39090 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
39097 \begin_layout Section
39099 \begin_inset Index idx
39102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39111 \begin_layout Standard
39112 At the bottom of the
39116 menu the opened documents are listed.
39119 \begin_layout Subsection
39120 Open/Close all Insets
39123 \begin_layout Standard
39124 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39127 \begin_layout Subsection
39128 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39131 \begin_layout Standard
39132 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39135 \begin_layout Standard
39136 Math macros are described in the
39143 \begin_layout Subsection
39147 \begin_layout Standard
39148 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39156 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39163 \begin_layout Subsection
39167 \begin_layout Standard
39168 Opens a window showing console messages.
39169 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
39170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39173 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39174 while LaTeX is processing the document.
39177 \begin_layout Subsection
39181 \begin_layout Standard
39182 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39183 default output format either in the preferences (see sec.
39184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39190 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39194 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
39195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39201 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
39205 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39206 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
39207 \begin_inset space ~
39211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39213 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39218 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
39219 The default output format is
39222 \begin_inset space ~
39230 \begin_layout Subsection
39231 View (Other Formats)
39234 \begin_layout Standard
39235 With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39236 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39237 actual document with an external program.
39238 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39239 the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
39240 All possible formats are listed in section
39241 \begin_inset space ~
39245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39247 reference "sub:Export"
39252 You should at least see the menu entry
39257 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
39258 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
39259 \begin_inset space ~
39263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39265 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39270 \begin_inset Index idx
39273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39274 Reconfiguration of LyX
39282 \begin_layout Standard
39283 Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
39284 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39291 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39296 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
39299 \begin_layout Subsection
39303 \begin_layout Standard
39304 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39305 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39308 \begin_layout Subsection
39309 Update (Other Formats)
39312 \begin_layout Standard
39313 With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats
39314 of your document without opening a new viewer window.
39317 \begin_layout Subsection
39318 View Master Document
39321 \begin_layout Standard
39322 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39338 \begin_inset space ~
39343 manual for more information on this topic).
39344 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39345 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
39350 generates the output of the whole book, while
39354 will just output the chapter alone.
39357 \begin_layout Standard
39358 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39359 in the preferences (see sec.
39360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39366 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39370 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
39371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39377 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
39384 \begin_layout Subsection
39385 Update Master Document
39388 \begin_layout Standard
39389 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39405 \begin_inset space ~
39410 manual for more information on this topic).
39411 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
39412 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
39415 \begin_layout Standard
39416 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39417 in the preferences (see sec.
39418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39424 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39428 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
39429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39435 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
39442 \begin_layout Subsection
39446 \begin_layout Standard
39447 This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally.
39448 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39449 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39450 You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3
39451 or more documents at the same time.
39452 To return to an unsplit view, use the menu
39459 \begin_layout Subsection
39463 \begin_layout Standard
39464 Closes a split view.
39467 \begin_layout Subsection
39471 \begin_layout Standard
39472 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39473 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39474 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
39475 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39476 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39479 \begin_layout Subsection
39481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39483 name "sub:Toolbars"
39488 \begin_inset Index idx
39491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39500 \begin_layout Standard
39501 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
39502 All toolbars and the
39505 \begin_inset space ~
39510 can be turned on and off.
39515 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39527 \begin_inset space ~
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39544 toolbars can be additionally set to the state
39548 that is denoted in the menu with the suffix
39555 \begin_layout Standard
39560 state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the
39564 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39565 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39566 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39567 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39568 is inside a formula or table, respectively.
39571 \begin_layout Standard
39572 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39573 \begin_inset space ~
39577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39579 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39586 \begin_layout Section
39588 \begin_inset Index idx
39591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39600 \begin_layout Subsection
39604 \begin_layout Standard
39605 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39606 \begin_inset space ~
39610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39612 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39623 \begin_layout Subsection
39625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39627 name "sub:Special-Character"
39634 \begin_layout Standard
39635 Here you can insert the following characters:
39638 \begin_layout Description
39639 Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system.
39640 Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available
39641 characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
39642 \begin_inset Newline newline
39646 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39654 Not all characters will be visible in the
39658 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39666 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
39670 ) can display every character.
39678 \begin_layout Description
39679 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
39683 \begin_layout Description
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39689 \begin_inset space ~
39692 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
39693 \begin_inset space ~
39697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39699 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
39706 \begin_layout Description
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39711 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the
39714 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39724 \begin_layout Description
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39729 Quote Inserts this quote:
39730 \begin_inset Quotes ers
39736 \begin_layout Description
39738 \begin_inset space ~
39741 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
39745 \begin_layout Description
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39750 Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
39754 \begin_layout Description
39756 \begin_inset space ~
39759 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
39763 \begin_layout Description
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39769 \begin_inset Index idx
39772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39779 \begin_inset Index idx
39782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39783 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39788 Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset.
39789 Here you can insert commands to create IPA phonetic symbols.
39790 For this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
39795 \begin_inset Index idx
39798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39799 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
39805 \begin_inset Newline newline
39808 For more information about this feature we refer you to the documentation
39812 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39820 and this Wiki-page:
39821 \begin_inset Newline newline
39825 \begin_inset Flex URL
39828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39830 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX
39838 \begin_layout Subsection
39842 \begin_layout Standard
39843 Here you can insert the following format constructs:
39846 \begin_layout Description
39847 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
39848 \begin_inset script superscript
39850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39859 \begin_layout Description
39860 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
39861 \begin_inset script subscript
39863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39872 \begin_layout Description
39874 \begin_inset space ~
39877 Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
39878 \begin_inset space ~
39882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39884 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
39891 \begin_layout Description
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39896 Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
39897 \begin_inset space ~
39901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39903 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
39910 \begin_layout Description
39912 \begin_inset space ~
39915 Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
39916 \begin_inset space ~
39920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39922 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
39929 \begin_layout Description
39931 \begin_inset space ~
39934 Space Inserts horizontal space, see section
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39941 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
39948 \begin_layout Description
39950 \begin_inset space ~
39953 Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section
39954 \begin_inset space ~
39958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39960 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
39967 \begin_layout Description
39969 \begin_inset space ~
39972 Space Inserts vertical space, see section
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39979 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
39986 \begin_layout Description
39987 Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39994 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
40001 \begin_layout Description
40003 \begin_inset space ~
40006 Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40013 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
40020 \begin_layout Description
40022 \begin_inset space ~
40025 Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
40026 \begin_inset space ~
40030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40032 reference "sub:Ligatures"
40039 \begin_layout Description
40041 \begin_inset space ~
40045 \begin_inset space ~
40048 Break Inserts a forced line break, see section
40049 \begin_inset space ~
40053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40055 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40062 \begin_layout Description
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40067 Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken
40068 text line to the page border, see section
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40075 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40082 \begin_layout Description
40084 \begin_inset space ~
40087 Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40094 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40101 \begin_layout Description
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40106 Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken
40107 text page to the page border, described in section
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40114 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40121 \begin_layout Description
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40126 Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section
40127 \begin_inset space ~
40131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40133 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40140 \begin_layout Description
40142 \begin_inset space ~
40146 \begin_inset space ~
40149 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40156 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40163 \begin_layout Subsection
40167 \begin_layout Standard
40168 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40169 The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described
40171 \begin_inset space ~
40175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40177 reference "sec:toc"
40182 The index list is described in section
40183 \begin_inset space ~
40187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40189 reference "sec:Index"
40193 , the nomenclature in section
40194 \begin_inset space ~
40198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40200 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40204 and the BibTeX bibliography in section
40205 \begin_inset space ~
40209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40211 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
40218 \begin_layout Subsection
40222 \begin_layout Standard
40223 To insert floats, described in section
40224 \begin_inset space ~
40228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40230 reference "sec:Floats"
40237 \begin_layout Subsection
40241 \begin_layout Standard
40242 To insert notes, described in section
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40249 reference "sec:Notes"
40256 \begin_layout Subsection
40260 \begin_layout Standard
40261 Inserts branch insets as described in section
40262 \begin_inset space ~
40266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40268 reference "sec:Branches"
40275 \begin_layout Subsection
40279 \begin_layout Standard
40280 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40281 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40283 An example is the document class
40284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40291 with three custom insets.
40294 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40300 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40303 \begin_layout Subsection
40305 \begin_inset Index idx
40308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40317 \begin_layout Standard
40318 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40320 How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter
40327 \begin_inset space ~
40335 \begin_layout Subsection
40337 \begin_inset Index idx
40340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40349 \begin_layout Standard
40350 Inserts a minipage box that is described section
40351 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40357 reference "sec:Minipages"
40362 All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter
40369 \begin_inset space ~
40377 \begin_layout Subsection
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40382 Inserts a citation as described in section
40383 \begin_inset space ~
40387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40389 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40396 \begin_layout Subsection
40400 \begin_layout Standard
40401 Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40408 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40415 \begin_layout Subsection
40419 \begin_layout Standard
40420 Inserts a label as described in section
40421 \begin_inset space ~
40425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40427 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40434 \begin_layout Subsection
40436 \begin_inset Index idx
40439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40446 \begin_inset Index idx
40449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40450 Longtables ! Caption
40458 \begin_layout Standard
40459 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
40460 Floats are described in section
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40467 reference "sec:Floats"
40471 , captions in longtables are described in the section
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40486 \begin_layout Subsection
40490 \begin_layout Standard
40491 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40498 reference "sec:Index"
40505 \begin_layout Subsection
40509 \begin_layout Standard
40510 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40517 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40524 \begin_layout Subsection
40528 \begin_layout Standard
40530 Tables are described in section
40531 \begin_inset space ~
40535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40537 reference "sec:Tables"
40544 \begin_layout Subsection
40548 \begin_layout Standard
40550 Graphics are described in section
40551 \begin_inset space ~
40555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40557 reference "sec:Graphics"
40564 \begin_layout Subsection
40568 \begin_layout Standard
40569 Inserts a URL as described in section
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40576 reference "sub:URLs"
40583 \begin_layout Subsection
40587 \begin_layout Standard
40588 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
40589 \begin_inset space ~
40593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40595 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
40602 \begin_layout Subsection
40606 \begin_layout Standard
40607 Inserts a footnote, see section
40608 \begin_inset space ~
40612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40614 reference "sec:Footnotes"
40621 \begin_layout Subsection
40625 \begin_layout Standard
40626 Inserts a marginal note, see section
40627 \begin_inset space ~
40631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40633 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
40640 \begin_layout Subsection
40644 \begin_layout Standard
40645 Inserts a short title, see section
40646 \begin_inset space ~
40650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40652 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40659 \begin_layout Subsection
40663 \begin_layout Standard
40664 Inserts a TeX Code box, see section
40665 \begin_inset space ~
40669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40671 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40678 \begin_layout Subsection
40680 \begin_inset Index idx
40683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40692 \begin_layout Standard
40693 Inserts a program listings box.
40694 Program listings are explained in the chapter
40696 Program Code Listings
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40709 \begin_layout Subsection
40713 \begin_layout Standard
40714 Inserts the actual date.
40715 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
40717 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
40725 \begin_inset space ~
40733 \begin_layout Subsection
40737 \begin_layout Standard
40738 Inserts a preview inset, see section
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40745 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40752 \begin_layout Section
40754 \begin_inset Index idx
40757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40766 \begin_layout Standard
40767 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
40768 \begin_inset space ~
40771 of the current document.
40772 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
40775 \begin_layout Subsection
40779 \begin_layout Standard
40780 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
40781 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
40783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40787 \begin_inset space \space{}
40791 \begin_inset space ~
40795 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
40796 \begin_inset space ~
40799 2.5 and use the submenu
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40813 \begin_inset space ~
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40823 \begin_inset space ~
40829 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
40833 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
40839 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
40845 \begin_layout Standard
40846 You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
40847 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40850 \begin_layout Subsection
40851 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40854 \begin_layout Standard
40855 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current
40859 \begin_layout Subsection
40863 \begin_layout Standard
40864 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40865 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40866 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40882 \begin_layout Subsection
40886 \begin_layout Standard
40887 This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part
40888 in the output, see section
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40899 \begin_inset space ~
40904 manual for a detailed description.
40907 \begin_layout Section
40909 \begin_inset Index idx
40912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40921 \begin_layout Subsection
40925 \begin_layout Standard
40926 Change Tracking is described in section
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40933 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40940 \begin_layout Subsection
40945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40955 \begin_layout Standard
40956 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
40958 It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program.
40961 \begin_layout Standard
40962 Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background.
40967 will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
40970 \begin_layout Subsection
40974 \begin_layout Standard
40975 Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
40976 \begin_inset space ~
40980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40982 reference "sec:Navigating"
40987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40989 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
40996 \begin_layout Subsection
40997 Start Appendix Here
41000 \begin_layout Standard
41001 This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
41002 position as described in section
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41009 reference "sec:Appendices"
41016 \begin_layout Subsection
41020 \begin_layout Standard
41021 Un/compresses the current document.
41024 \begin_layout Subsection
41028 \begin_layout Standard
41029 The document settings are described in appendix
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41036 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41043 \begin_layout Section
41045 \begin_inset Index idx
41048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41057 \begin_layout Subsection
41061 \begin_layout Standard
41062 Spell checking is explained in section
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41069 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
41076 \begin_layout Subsection
41080 \begin_layout Standard
41081 The thesaurus is described in section
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41088 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
41095 \begin_layout Subsection
41097 \begin_inset Index idx
41100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41107 \begin_inset Index idx
41110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41119 \begin_layout Standard
41120 Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted
41124 \begin_layout Subsection
41126 \begin_inset Index idx
41129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41138 \begin_layout Standard
41139 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
41143 \begin_layout Subsection
41145 \begin_inset Index idx
41148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41149 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41160 Reconfiguration of LyX
41164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41177 \begin_inset Index idx
41180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41181 Reconfiguration of LyX
41189 \begin_layout Standard
41190 This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages
41191 and programs it needs; see also section
41192 \begin_inset space ~
41196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41198 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41205 \begin_layout Subsection
41209 \begin_layout Standard
41210 The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41217 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41224 \begin_layout Section
41226 \begin_inset Index idx
41229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41238 \begin_layout Standard
41239 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
41241 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
41245 \begin_layout Standard
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41254 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
41255 found by LyX (see also section
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41262 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
41269 \begin_layout Section
41271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41273 name "sec:Toolbars"
41280 \begin_layout Standard
41281 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41288 reference "sub:Toolbars"
41295 \begin_layout Standard
41296 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41297 This is described in the
41299 Additional Features
41304 \begin_layout Subsection
41306 \begin_inset Index idx
41309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41318 \begin_layout Standard
41319 \begin_inset Graphics
41320 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41328 \begin_layout Standard
41329 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41335 \begin_layout Standard
41336 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41353 \begin_inset Note Note
41356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41357 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41362 manual for more information.
41370 \begin_layout Standard
41371 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41377 \begin_layout Standard
41378 \begin_inset Tabular
41379 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41380 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41381 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
41382 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
41384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41388 \begin_inset Graphics
41389 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41403 pull-down box for the environments
41416 \begin_layout Standard
41417 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41423 \begin_layout Standard
41425 \begin_inset Tabular
41426 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="2">
41427 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41428 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
41429 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
41430 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41453 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41460 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41513 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41529 arg "dialog-show print"
41537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41543 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41559 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41573 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41603 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41633 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41663 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41693 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41723 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41739 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41753 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41777 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41791 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41792 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 Emphasize text, function of the
41822 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41824 \begin_inset space ~
41835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41856 Set text to noun style, function of the
41858 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41860 \begin_inset space ~
41871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41880 arg "textstyle-apply"
41888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 Formats text using the current settings in the
41894 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41931 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41933 \begin_inset space ~
41942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41951 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41965 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41979 arg "tabular-insert"
41987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41993 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42009 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
42017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42021 Toggle outline window on/off,
42023 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42030 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42039 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
42047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42051 Toggle math toolbar on/off
42057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42066 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
42074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42078 Toggle table toolbar on/off
42091 \begin_layout Subsection
42093 \begin_inset Index idx
42096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42105 \begin_layout Standard
42106 \begin_inset Graphics
42107 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
42115 \begin_layout Standard
42116 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42122 \begin_layout Standard
42123 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42127 \begin_layout Standard
42128 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42134 \begin_layout Standard
42135 \begin_inset Tabular
42136 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
42137 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42138 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
42139 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
42140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42176 arg "layout Enumerate"
42184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42203 arg "layout Itemize"
42211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42257 arg "layout Description"
42265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42284 arg "depth-increment"
42292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42298 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42300 \begin_inset space ~
42304 \begin_inset space ~
42313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42322 arg "depth-decrement"
42330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42336 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42338 \begin_inset space ~
42342 \begin_inset space ~
42351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42360 arg "float-insert figure"
42368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42374 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42375 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 arg "float-insert table"
42399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42405 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42406 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42436 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42452 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42466 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42482 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42496 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42526 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42528 \begin_inset space ~
42537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42546 arg "nomencl-insert"
42554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42560 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42580 arg "footnote-insert"
42588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42594 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42610 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42624 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42658 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42659 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42661 \begin_inset space ~
42670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42679 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42693 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42723 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42753 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42770 \begin_inset space ~
42779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42788 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42802 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42803 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42810 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42819 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42833 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42834 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42836 \begin_inset space ~
42845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42854 arg "dialog-show character"
42862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42868 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42870 \begin_inset space ~
42879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42888 arg "layout-paragraph"
42896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42902 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42904 \begin_inset space ~
42913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42922 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42936 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42950 \begin_layout Subsection
42951 View / Update Toolbar
42952 \begin_inset Index idx
42955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42956 Toolbar ! View / Update
42964 \begin_layout Standard
42965 \begin_inset Graphics
42966 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42973 \begin_layout Standard
42974 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42980 \begin_layout Standard
42981 The view / update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the
42985 \begin_layout Standard
42986 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42993 \begin_inset Tabular
42994 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42995 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42996 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
42997 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
42998 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43021 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43028 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43037 arg "buffer-update"
43045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43051 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43058 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43067 arg "master-buffer-view"
43075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43081 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43088 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43097 arg "master-buffer-update"
43105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43111 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43113 \begin_inset space ~
43122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43131 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
43139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43145 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43146 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43147 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43148 Synchronize with Output
43154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43159 \begin_inset Graphics
43160 filename ../images/view-others.png
43162 groupId toolbarbuttons
43173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43179 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43180 View (Other Formats)
43186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43191 \begin_inset Graphics
43192 filename ../images/update-others.png
43194 groupId toolbarbuttons
43203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43209 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43210 Update (Other Formats)
43223 \begin_layout Standard
43224 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
43228 \begin_layout Subsection
43232 \begin_layout Standard
43233 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
43234 \begin_inset space ~
43238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43240 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43244 , the table toolbar
43245 \begin_inset Index idx
43248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43257 \begin_inset space ~
43262 manual, the math macro toolbar
43263 \begin_inset Index idx
43266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43279 \begin_layout Chapter
43280 The Document Settings
43281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43283 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43288 \begin_inset Index idx
43291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43292 Document ! Settings
43300 \begin_layout Standard
43301 The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the
43302 whole document and is called with the menu
43304 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43308 You can save your document settings as default with the
43310 Save as Document Defaults
43312 button in the dialog.
43313 This will create a template named
43317 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
43321 \begin_layout Standard
43326 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43327 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43330 \begin_layout Standard
43331 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43334 \begin_layout Section
43338 \begin_layout Standard
43339 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43341 Document classes are described in section
43342 \begin_inset space ~
43346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43348 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43356 \begin_layout Standard
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43365 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
43369 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class.
43370 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43372 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
43381 \begin_layout Standard
43382 Some classes use special class options by default.
43383 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43387 and you can decide to use them or not.
43388 If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is
43389 recommended to leave them untouched.
43394 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43399 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
43400 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43406 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43407 \begin_inset Newline newline
43412 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43415 \begin_inset Newline newline
43418 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
43424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43426 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43438 \begin_layout Standard
43439 Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child
43441 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
43442 document is opened without its master.
43443 This way child documents are always compilable.
43444 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43459 \begin_layout Standard
43460 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
43470 \begin_inset Index idx
43473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43474 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
43480 \begin_inset Index idx
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
43489 for cross-references, see sec.
43490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43496 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43503 \begin_layout Section
43507 \begin_layout Standard
43508 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43509 Please refer to the section
43512 \begin_inset space ~
43520 \begin_inset space ~
43525 manual for details.
43528 \begin_layout Section
43532 \begin_layout Standard
43533 Modules are explained in section
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43540 reference "sub:Modules"
43547 \begin_layout Section
43551 \begin_layout Standard
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43559 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
43566 \begin_layout Section
43570 \begin_layout Standard
43571 The document font settings are described in section
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43578 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43585 \begin_layout Section
43589 \begin_layout Standard
43590 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical
43592 The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here.
43594 \change_inserted 2090807402 1325640630
43595 You can also determine whether text will be shown as justified in LyX itself.
43596 Note that this does not affect whether the text is justified in the output.
43601 \begin_layout Standard
43602 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen.
43603 That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43605 However, it will be as you specified it in the output.
43608 \begin_layout Section
43612 \begin_layout Standard
43613 A description of this menu is given in section
43614 \begin_inset space ~
43618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43620 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43627 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
43634 \begin_layout Section
43638 \begin_layout Standard
43639 Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
43640 \begin_inset space ~
43644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43646 reference "sub:Margins"
43653 \begin_layout Section
43655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43657 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43662 \begin_inset Index idx
43665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43666 Language ! Encoding
43674 \begin_layout Standard
43675 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43676 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
43677 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
43678 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43679 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
43680 known for a particular character).
43684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43685 The known commands are defined in a text file (
43690 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
43695 manual for details.
43703 \begin_layout Standard
43704 If you use the option
43708 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43709 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43710 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
43711 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43712 exactly one encoding.
43713 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43716 \begin_layout Standard
43717 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43718 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43719 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
43720 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43721 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
43722 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43727 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
43728 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
43729 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43730 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
43731 engines to standard LaTeX.
43732 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43733 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43736 \begin_inset space ~
43743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43755 \begin_inset space ~
43762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43780 \begin_inset space ~
43784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43786 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
43791 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43795 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43798 \begin_layout Standard
43802 \begin_inset space ~
43807 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43817 The possible settings are:
43820 \begin_layout Description
43821 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43823 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43824 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43828 \begin_inset space ~
43832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43834 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
43841 \begin_layout Description
43842 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43843 format you will use.
43844 In many cases this will be
43849 \begin_inset Index idx
43852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43859 If the newer package
43864 \begin_inset Index idx
43867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43868 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43873 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
43874 this package will be used instead of
43881 \begin_layout Description
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43894 would be more appropriate.
43897 \begin_layout Description
43898 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43899 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43903 (for German texts), type in
43906 \begin_inset Newline newline
43911 usepackage{ngerman}
43914 \begin_layout Description
43915 None will not use a language package.
43916 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43919 \begin_layout Standard
43920 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43923 \begin_layout Description
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43929 \begin_inset space ~
43933 \begin_inset space ~
43940 , but the LaTeX-package
43945 \begin_inset Index idx
43948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43949 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
43955 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43956 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43957 languages in TeX code.
43960 \begin_layout Description
43961 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43962 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
43963 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
43966 \begin_layout Description
43968 \begin_inset space ~
43972 \begin_inset space ~
43975 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43978 \begin_layout Description
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43984 \begin_inset space ~
43987 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43990 \begin_layout Description
43992 \begin_inset space ~
43995 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43998 \begin_layout Description
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44007 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
44008 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
44011 \begin_layout Description
44013 \begin_inset space ~
44017 \begin_inset space ~
44020 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
44024 \begin_layout Description
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44030 \begin_inset space ~
44033 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
44034 ISO-8859-13 encoding
44037 \begin_layout Description
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44050 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44057 \begin_layout Description
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44063 \begin_inset space ~
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44070 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
44071 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
44074 \begin_layout Description
44076 \begin_inset space ~
44080 \begin_inset space ~
44083 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
44084 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
44085 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44090 \begin_inset space ~
44096 \begin_layout Description
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44105 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
44106 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
44107 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
44108 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44113 \begin_inset space ~
44119 \begin_layout Description
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44128 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
44131 \begin_layout Description
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44140 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
44143 \begin_layout Description
44145 \begin_inset space ~
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44152 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
44155 \begin_layout Description
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44160 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
44163 \begin_layout Description
44165 \begin_inset space ~
44168 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
44171 \begin_layout Description
44173 \begin_inset space ~
44177 \begin_inset space ~
44180 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
44183 \begin_layout Description
44185 \begin_inset space ~
44189 \begin_inset space ~
44195 \begin_layout Description
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44204 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44207 \begin_layout Description
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44213 \begin_inset space ~
44219 \begin_layout Description
44221 \begin_inset space ~
44225 \begin_inset space ~
44228 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
44233 \begin_inset Index idx
44236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44237 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
44242 , when using this, set the document language to
44247 \begin_layout Description
44249 \begin_inset space ~
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44256 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
44260 , when using this, set the document language to
44263 \begin_inset space ~
44269 \begin_layout Description
44271 \begin_inset space ~
44275 \begin_inset space ~
44278 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
44283 \begin_inset Index idx
44286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44287 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
44292 , when using this, set the document language to
44297 \begin_layout Description
44299 \begin_inset space ~
44303 \begin_inset space ~
44306 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
44310 , when using this, set the document language to
44315 \begin_layout Description
44317 \begin_inset space ~
44321 \begin_inset space ~
44324 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
44328 , when using this, set the document language to
44333 \begin_layout Description
44335 \begin_inset space ~
44338 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44341 \begin_layout Description
44343 \begin_inset space ~
44347 \begin_inset space ~
44351 \begin_inset space ~
44354 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44357 \begin_layout Description
44359 \begin_inset space ~
44363 \begin_inset space ~
44367 \begin_inset space ~
44370 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44371 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44372 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44375 \begin_layout Description
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44387 \begin_layout Description
44389 \begin_inset space ~
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44396 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44397 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44400 \begin_layout Description
44402 \begin_inset space ~
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44409 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
44414 \begin_inset Index idx
44417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44418 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
44423 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44426 \begin_layout Description
44428 \begin_inset space ~
44432 \begin_inset space ~
44435 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44443 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
44448 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
44450 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44453 \begin_layout Description
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44459 \begin_inset space ~
44462 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
44467 \begin_inset Index idx
44470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44471 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
44476 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44479 \begin_layout Description
44481 \begin_inset space ~
44484 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
44489 \begin_inset Index idx
44492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44493 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
44499 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44503 \begin_layout Description
44505 \begin_inset space ~
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44513 \begin_inset space ~
44516 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44517 \begin_inset space ~
44523 \begin_layout Description
44525 \begin_inset space ~
44529 \begin_inset space ~
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44536 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44537 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44538 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44542 \begin_layout Description
44544 \begin_inset space ~
44548 \begin_inset space ~
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44555 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44556 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44559 \begin_layout Standard
44560 Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the
44563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44569 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
44573 for more information on the language package.
44576 \begin_layout Section
44578 \begin_inset Index idx
44581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44588 \begin_inset Index idx
44591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44600 \begin_layout Standard
44601 Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and
44603 \begin_inset space ~
44606 out notes (default: light grey).
44611 sets the color back to the default.
44614 \begin_layout Standard
44615 You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white)
44617 \begin_inset space ~
44620 boxes (default: red).
44623 \begin_layout Standard
44624 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44628 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44633 out note appears blue in the output.)
44641 \begin_layout Standard
44642 Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option
44645 \begin_inset space ~
44650 in the document settings under
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44658 , you probably also need to change the link font color by using
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44669 \begin_inset space ~
44675 For example the option
44678 \begin_layout Standard
44684 \begin_layout Standard
44685 sets the link text color to black.
44686 For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package
44691 \begin_inset Index idx
44694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44695 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
44701 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44710 \begin_layout Standard
44711 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44717 \begin_layout Standard
44718 You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every
44719 page in your document if you use these commands as TeX
44720 \begin_inset space ~
44723 Code behind a forced page break:
44726 \begin_layout Itemize
44727 For the page color:
44728 \begin_inset Newline newline
44735 pagecolor{color name}
44738 \begin_layout Itemize
44739 For the text color:
44740 \begin_inset Newline newline
44750 \begin_layout Standard
44751 The color name can hereby be one of these:
44784 \begin_inset Newline newline
44787 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the
44791 \begin_layout Itemize
44792 For the page background color:
44793 \begin_inset Newline newline
44798 page_backgroundcolor
44801 \begin_layout Itemize
44802 For the main text color:
44803 \begin_inset Newline newline
44811 \begin_layout Itemize
44813 \begin_inset space ~
44816 box background color:
44817 \begin_inset Newline newline
44825 \begin_layout Itemize
44827 \begin_inset space ~
44830 out note text color:
44831 \begin_inset Newline newline
44839 \begin_layout Standard
44840 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44843 \begin_inset space ~
44851 \begin_inset space ~
44859 \begin_layout Section
44863 \begin_layout Standard
44864 Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section
44865 depth in the table of contents as described in section
44866 \begin_inset space ~
44870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44872 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
44879 \begin_layout Section
44883 \begin_layout Standard
44884 Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages
44889 \begin_inset Index idx
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44893 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
44903 \begin_inset Index idx
44906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44907 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
44913 You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package
44918 \begin_inset Index idx
44921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44922 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
44927 and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being
44929 For a further description see section
44930 \begin_inset space ~
44934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44936 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44943 \begin_layout Section
44947 \begin_layout Standard
44948 Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated
44949 and you can define additional indexes.
44950 Please refer to section
44951 \begin_inset space ~
44955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44957 reference "sec:Index"
44964 \begin_layout Section
44968 \begin_layout Standard
44969 The PDF properties are explained in section
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44976 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44983 \begin_layout Section
44987 \begin_layout Standard
44988 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
44993 \begin_inset Index idx
44996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44997 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
45007 \begin_inset Index idx
45010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45011 LaTeX-packages ! esint
45021 \begin_inset Index idx
45024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45025 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
45035 \begin_inset Index idx
45038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45039 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
45044 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45047 \begin_layout Description
45048 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
45049 ensure that you have enabled
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45060 \begin_layout Description
45061 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45064 \begin_inset space ~
45076 \begin_layout Description
45077 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45088 \begin_layout Description
45089 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45091 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45100 \begin_layout Section
45104 \begin_layout Standard
45105 The float placement options are described in section
45108 \begin_inset space ~
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45124 \begin_layout Section
45128 \begin_layout Standard
45129 The listings settings are explained in chapter
45131 Program Code Listings
45136 \begin_inset space ~
45144 \begin_layout Section
45148 \begin_layout Standard
45149 Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
45150 The itemize environment is described in section
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45157 reference "sec:Itemize"
45164 \begin_layout Section
45168 \begin_layout Standard
45169 Branches are described in section
45170 \begin_inset space ~
45174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45176 reference "sec:Branches"
45183 \begin_layout Section
45185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45187 name "sec:Doc-Output"
45194 \begin_layout Standard
45195 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45198 \begin_layout Description
45200 \begin_inset space ~
45204 \begin_inset space ~
45207 Format: The format that is used when you hit
45208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45227 View Master Document
45228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45235 Update Master Document
45236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45243 menu or the toolbar.
45244 The default is set in
45246 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45247 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45257 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45264 \begin_layout Description
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45270 \begin_inset space ~
45273 Output settings for the menu
45275 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45277 \begin_inset space ~
45283 For a detailed description see section
45285 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45290 \begin_inset space ~
45298 \begin_layout Description
45300 \begin_inset space ~
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45307 Options settings for the export format
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45320 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45321 \begin_inset space ~
45324 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45333 settings are described in detail in section
45335 Math Output in XHTML
45340 \begin_inset space ~
45346 The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output.
45349 \begin_layout Section
45354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45364 \begin_layout Standard
45365 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
45366 or to define LaTeX-commands.
45367 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
45368 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
45372 \begin_layout Standard
45373 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
45374 \begin_inset space ~
45378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45380 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
45387 \begin_layout Chapter
45393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45395 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45400 \begin_inset Index idx
45403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45412 \begin_layout Standard
45413 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45415 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45419 It has the following submenus.
45422 \begin_layout Section
45426 \begin_layout Subsection
45430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45431 User Interface File
45432 \begin_inset Index idx
45435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45436 Customization ! of toolbars
45442 \begin_inset Index idx
45445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45446 Customization ! of menus
45454 \begin_layout Standard
45455 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45456 interface (ui) file.
45457 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45458 The toolbar buttons and menu entries are specified in the files
45467 Both files are loaded by the
45472 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these
45473 files and edit the entries.
45476 \begin_layout Standard
45477 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: The
45489 entries must be finished with an explicit
45514 and in the case of the
45515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45527 The syntax for the entries is:
45530 \begin_layout Standard
45531 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45559 \begin_layout Standard
45561 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45564 All LyX-functions are listed in the menu
45566 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45577 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45583 \begin_layout Standard
45584 An example: Assuming you use the menu
45586 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45589 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45593 \begin_layout Standard
45594 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45618 \begin_layout Standard
45620 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45631 menu in the .inc-file to have the sixth bookmark.
45634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45638 \begin_layout Standard
45639 Here you can change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
45640 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45641 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45644 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45651 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45655 \begin_layout Standard
45658 Enable tool tips in main work area
45660 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45668 \begin_layout Standard
45671 Restore window layouts and geometries
45673 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
45674 in the last LyX session.
45677 \begin_layout Standard
45680 Restore cursor positions
45682 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45686 \begin_layout Standard
45689 Load opened files from last session
45691 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
45694 \begin_layout Standard
45697 Clear all session information
45699 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
45700 of last opened documents, etc.).
45703 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45707 name "sub:Backup documents"
45712 \begin_inset Index idx
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45724 \begin_layout Standard
45727 Backup original documents when saving
45729 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45730 it was saved the last time.
45731 It is stored in the same folder as your document or in the
45734 \begin_inset space ~
45740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45742 reference "sec:Paths"
45747 The backup file has the file extension
45748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45762 \begin_layout Standard
45765 Backup documents, every
45767 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45770 \begin_layout Standard
45773 Save documents compressed by default
45775 saves the files always in a compressed format.
45778 \begin_layout Standard
45783 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
45786 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45788 \begin_inset space ~
45796 \begin_layout Standard
45799 Open documents in tabs
45801 is not used, then every file will be opened in its own new instance of
45805 \begin_layout Standard
45810 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
45814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45822 reference "sec:Paths"
45826 for information about LyXServer pipes.
45832 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
45834 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
45837 \begin_layout Standard
45840 Single close-tab button
45842 there will only be one button (
45845 \begin_inset Graphics
45846 filename ../images/closetab.png
45853 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45854 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45857 \begin_layout Standard
45858 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45866 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
45874 \begin_layout Subsection
45876 \begin_inset Index idx
45879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45888 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
45895 \begin_layout Standard
45896 These fonts are used to display your documents on the screen.
45899 \begin_layout Standard
45900 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45908 This section only deals with the fonts
45913 The fonts that appear on the output are independent from these fonts, and
45916 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45917 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45928 \begin_layout Standard
45929 By default, LyX uses
45933 as roman (serif) font,
45941 (depends on the system) as
45944 \begin_inset space ~
45960 \begin_layout Standard
45961 You can change the font size with the
45968 \begin_layout Standard
45973 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45978 points have the size of 1
45979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45989 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45994 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45999 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46000 \begin_inset space ~
46004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46006 reference "sub:Document-Font"
46013 \begin_layout Standard
46016 Use Pixmap Cache to speed up font rendering
46018 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
46019 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46020 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46021 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46023 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46024 \begin_inset space ~
46030 \begin_layout Subsection
46032 \begin_inset Index idx
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46042 \begin_inset Index idx
46045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46054 \begin_layout Standard
46055 Here you can change all the colors used by LyX.
46056 Choose an item in the list and use the
46063 \begin_layout Standard
46064 By using the option
46068 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46071 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46072 \begin_inset space ~
46076 \begin_inset space ~
46081 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46084 \begin_layout Subsection
46086 \begin_inset Index idx
46089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46098 \begin_layout Standard
46099 Here you can specify if graphics inside LyX are displayed.
46102 \begin_layout Standard
46107 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46108 This feature is described in section
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46115 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46122 \begin_layout Standard
46126 \begin_inset space ~
46130 \begin_inset space ~
46134 \begin_inset space ~
46139 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46142 \begin_layout Section
46144 \begin_inset Index idx
46147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46156 \begin_layout Subsection
46160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46164 \begin_layout Standard
46167 Cursor follows scrollbar
46169 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46173 \begin_layout Standard
46174 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46175 If you set the value to zero the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46176 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46179 \begin_layout Standard
46182 Scroll below end of document
46184 is self-explanatory.
46187 \begin_layout Standard
46188 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
46195 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46197 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46198 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46201 \begin_layout Standard
46204 Sort environments alphabetically
46206 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46209 \begin_layout Standard
46212 Group environments by their category
46214 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46217 \begin_layout Standard
46218 The math macro editing option determines the editing style, see the section
46230 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46234 \begin_layout Standard
46235 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46240 specifies the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46241 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46245 \begin_layout Subsection
46247 \begin_inset Index idx
46250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46257 \begin_inset Index idx
46260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 Settings ! Shortcuts
46269 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46273 \begin_layout Standard
46274 Bindings are used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
46275 Several binding files are available:
46278 \begin_layout Description
46279 cua.bind typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46282 \begin_layout Description
46283 (x)emacs.bind set of bindings like they are used in the editor programs
46294 \begin_layout Description
46295 mac.bind set of bindings for
46298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46306 \begin_layout Standard
46307 There are also bind-files designed for special document classes, like
46311 , and bind files for special languages.
46312 The names of language bind-files begin with a language code, e.
46313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46317 \begin_inset space \space{}
46321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46329 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
46333 \begin_layout Standard
46334 Some bind-files, like
46338 , have only a small scope.
46339 When looking at the end of the file
46343 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46350 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
46355 \begin_inset Index idx
46358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46359 Key Bindings ! Editing
46367 \begin_layout Standard
46368 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46369 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
46370 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46373 Show key-bindings containing
46376 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46377 Insert there for example as keyword
46378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46385 and you get the 4 different existing shortcuts for the 3 different functions
46387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46395 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46396 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
46400 that you will find in the
46407 \begin_layout Standard
46409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46413 \begin_inset space \space{}
46424 , select the function and press the
46429 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46430 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46431 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46432 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by modifying an existing
46433 binding and adding the different function names as a semicolon separated
46435 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46437 The binding for the function
46441 is an example of this.
46444 \begin_layout Standard
46445 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying bind-files with a
46447 The syntax of the entries is:
46450 \begin_layout Standard
46456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46474 \begin_layout Subsection
46476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46478 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
46483 \begin_inset Index idx
46486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46493 \begin_inset Index idx
46496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46497 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46505 \begin_layout Standard
46506 Normally keyboard settings have to be done in a menu of your operating system.
46507 For the case that this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
46509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46513 \begin_inset space \space{}
46516 a Czech keyboard but want to write with it like with a Romanian one, you
46517 can use the keyboard map file named
46524 \begin_layout Standard
46525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46533 Keyboard maps are only provided as makeshift and don't work on all systems.
46541 \begin_layout Standard
46542 You can furthermore specify here the
46544 Wheel scrolling speed
46547 The standard value is 1.0, higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46551 \begin_layout Standard
46556 you can select a key for zooming.
46557 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46560 \begin_layout Subsection
46564 \begin_layout Standard
46565 Input completion is described in sec.
46566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46572 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46579 \begin_layout Section
46581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46588 \begin_inset Index idx
46591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46598 \begin_inset Index idx
46601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46610 \begin_layout Description
46612 \begin_inset space ~
46615 directory This is LyX's working directory.
46616 It is the default when you
46627 \begin_inset space ~
46635 \begin_layout Description
46637 \begin_inset space ~
46640 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46642 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
46644 \begin_inset space ~
46648 \begin_inset space ~
46656 \begin_layout Description
46658 \begin_inset space ~
46661 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46667 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
46671 \begin_inset Newline newline
46675 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46687 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46695 \begin_layout Description
46697 \begin_inset space ~
46701 \begin_inset Index idx
46704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46710 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46711 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46712 \begin_inset space ~
46716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46718 reference "sub:Backup documents"
46726 will be used to save the backups.
46727 \begin_inset Newline newline
46730 Backup files have the ending
46731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46741 \begin_layout Description
46746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46754 \begin_inset space ~
46757 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46758 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
46759 \begin_inset Newline newline
46766 You add a BibTeX-database
46771 You can edit this file with the program
46780 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
46783 \begin_inset space ~
46789 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46794 and click on the LyX-symbol.
46795 The entry will now be inserted as citation at the current cursor position
46801 and LyX need of course to be run the same time.
46802 \begin_inset Newline newline
46805 The pipe is also used for the
46810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46816 reference "sub:Backup documents"
46821 \begin_inset Newline newline
46824 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46825 \begin_inset Newline newline
46841 \begin_layout Description
46843 \begin_inset space ~
46846 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46849 \begin_layout Description
46851 \begin_inset space ~
46854 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46855 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does otherwise not work or
46856 if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46859 \begin_layout Description
46861 \begin_inset space ~
46864 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46870 You only need to specify it if you are using
46874 and spell checking does otherwise not work or if you want to use custom/alterna
46880 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46884 \begin_layout Description
46886 \begin_inset space ~
46889 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46890 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list where
46891 to find it on the system.
46892 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
46893 is configured, so that you normally don't have to modify it.
46895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46902 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46903 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46906 \begin_layout Description
46908 \begin_inset space ~
46911 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows to use external files which
46912 are included to a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the document
46914 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46916 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46917 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46918 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46919 scanned for the input files.
46920 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
46921 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
46922 It is recommended to include always '.' as one of the paths, otherwise compilati
46923 on may fail for some documents.
46926 \begin_layout Section
46930 \begin_layout Standard
46931 Here you can insert your name and email address.
46932 The identity will be used when you have enabled change tracking as described
46934 \begin_inset space ~
46938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46940 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46944 , to mark changes you make as yours.
46947 \begin_layout Section
46949 \begin_inset Index idx
46952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46953 Language ! Settings
46959 \begin_inset Index idx
46962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46963 Settings ! Language
46971 \begin_layout Subsection
46973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46975 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
46982 \begin_layout Description
46984 \begin_inset space ~
46988 \begin_inset space ~
46991 language Here you can select the language of LyX's menus.
46992 You find the actual translation status here:
46993 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46995 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47002 \begin_layout Description
47004 \begin_inset space ~
47007 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
47009 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47010 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47027 The most widespread language package is
47032 \begin_inset Index idx
47035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47036 LaTeX-packages ! babel
47041 , it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
47042 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
47043 alternative language package
47048 \begin_inset Index idx
47051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47052 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
47057 that is more suited for the multi-script support of these engines.
47058 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47060 The available selections are described in sec.
47061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47067 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47074 \begin_layout Description
47076 \begin_inset space ~
47079 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
47080 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
47081 An example is the start command
47087 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47092 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47107 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47112 \begin_layout Description
47114 \begin_inset space ~
47122 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47123 command toggles the package on and off.
47126 \begin_layout Description
47128 \begin_inset space ~
47132 \begin_inset space ~
47135 Point Define the default decimal point for the use in tables (decimal point
47139 \begin_layout Description
47141 \begin_inset space ~
47145 \begin_inset space ~
47148 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47149 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47150 used by all LaTeX-packages.
47151 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47158 \begin_layout Description
47160 \begin_inset space ~
47163 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47165 When this option is not set, the
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47173 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
47174 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47177 \begin_inset space ~
47185 \begin_layout Description
47187 \begin_inset space ~
47193 \begin_inset space ~
47199 When it is not set, the
47202 \begin_inset space ~
47207 is set to the end of the document.
47210 \begin_layout Description
47212 \begin_inset space ~
47216 \begin_inset space ~
47219 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47220 language will be underlined in blue.
47223 \begin_layout Description
47225 \begin_inset space ~
47229 \begin_inset space ~
47232 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47233 like Arabic, Hebrew, Farsi.
47236 \begin_layout Description
47238 \begin_inset space ~
47241 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47242 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47243 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47244 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47247 \begin_layout Subsection
47251 \begin_layout Standard
47252 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47253 \begin_inset space ~
47257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47259 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47266 \begin_layout Section
47270 \begin_layout Subsection
47274 \begin_layout Description
47276 \begin_inset space ~
47280 \begin_inset space ~
47283 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47286 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
47287 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
47289 \begin_inset space ~
47295 Setting the line line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless
47299 \begin_layout Description
47301 \begin_inset space ~
47305 \begin_inset Index idx
47308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47315 \begin_inset Index idx
47318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47319 Settings ! Date format
47324 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47325 \begin_inset Newline newline
47329 \begin_inset Flex URL
47332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47334 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
47340 \begin_inset Newline newline
47343 For example the format
47344 \begin_inset Newline newline
47348 \begin_inset Newline newline
47351 prints the date as day/month/year.
47354 \begin_layout Description
47356 \begin_inset space ~
47360 \begin_inset space ~
47363 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
47366 \begin_layout Description
47368 \begin_inset space ~
47371 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47373 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
47375 \begin_inset space ~
47381 For a detailed description see section
47383 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47388 \begin_inset space ~
47396 \begin_layout Subsection
47398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47405 \begin_inset Index idx
47408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47415 \begin_inset Index idx
47418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47427 \begin_layout Description
47429 \begin_inset space ~
47432 printer Here you can specify the name of your default printer.
47433 The name will be used when the
47438 \begin_inset Newline newline
47442 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47450 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
47458 \begin_layout Description
47460 \begin_inset space ~
47463 command is the command LyX
47464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47471 LaTeX uses for printing.
47479 \begin_layout Description
47481 \begin_inset space ~
47485 \begin_inset space ~
47488 Options Here you can specify printer options.
47489 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
47490 of the program that provides the
47497 \begin_layout Description
47499 \begin_inset space ~
47503 \begin_inset space ~
47507 \begin_inset space ~
47510 printer This option works only for the
47515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47527 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
47528 This is an option only for dvips experts.
47531 \begin_layout Subsection
47536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47546 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
47551 \begin_inset Index idx
47554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47563 \begin_layout Description
47565 \begin_inset space ~
47572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47580 \begin_inset space ~
47584 \begin_inset space ~
47587 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47592 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47613 are used for Cyrillic.
47614 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47627 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47628 LyX sets up in the background.
47629 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47632 \begin_layout Description
47634 \begin_inset space ~
47638 \begin_inset space ~
47641 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
47646 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
47649 \begin_layout Description
47651 \begin_inset space ~
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47659 \begin_inset space ~
47663 \begin_inset space ~
47666 options They only have an effect when the program
47670 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47673 \begin_layout Standard
47674 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47675 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47676 manuals of the applications.
47679 \begin_layout Description
47681 \begin_inset space ~
47684 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47691 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
47698 \begin_layout Description
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47703 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47710 reference "sub:Index-Program"
47717 \begin_layout Description
47719 \begin_inset space ~
47722 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47729 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
47736 \begin_layout Description
47741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47749 \begin_inset space ~
47752 command Command for the program
47756 that is described in the section
47762 Additional Features
47767 \begin_layout Standard
47768 There are additionally the following options:
47771 \begin_layout Description
47773 \begin_inset space ~
47777 \begin_inset space ~
47781 \begin_inset space ~
47785 \begin_inset space ~
47789 \begin_inset space ~
47792 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47810 to separate folders.
47811 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
47812 \begin_inset Index idx
47815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47822 \begin_inset Index idx
47825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47834 \begin_layout Description
47836 \begin_inset space ~
47840 \begin_inset space ~
47844 \begin_inset space ~
47848 \begin_inset space ~
47852 \begin_inset space ~
47856 \begin_inset space ~
47859 changes Removes all manually set document class options in the
47861 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
47864 dialog when changing the document class.
47867 \begin_layout Section
47869 \begin_inset space ~
47873 \begin_inset Index idx
47876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47885 \begin_layout Subsection
47887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47889 name "sub:Converters"
47894 \begin_inset Index idx
47897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47906 \begin_layout Standard
47907 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47908 from one format to another.
47909 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47910 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the field
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47927 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47931 \begin_inset space ~
47936 drop-down list, modify the
47940 field and press the
47947 \begin_layout Standard
47950 Converter File Cache
47952 is enabled, conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47955 Maximum Age (in days
47958 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47959 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47962 \begin_layout Standard
47963 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47964 definition, is described in the section
47975 \begin_layout Subsection
47977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47979 name "sec:File-Formats"
47984 \begin_inset Index idx
47987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47994 \begin_inset Index idx
47997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48006 \begin_layout Standard
48007 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
48008 You can modify the viewer and editor program that should be used for certain
48012 \begin_layout Standard
48013 Furthermore, you can define the
48015 Default output format
48017 that is used when you use
48019 View, Update, View Master Document
48023 Update Master Document
48029 menu or the toolbar.
48032 \begin_layout Standard
48033 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48044 \begin_layout Standard
48045 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
48046 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48047 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48048 This is done by specifying a
48053 More about this is described in the section
48064 \begin_layout Chapter
48065 Units available in LyX
48066 \begin_inset Index idx
48069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48078 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48085 \begin_layout Standard
48086 To understand the units described in this documentation,
48087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48089 reference "tab:Units"
48093 explains all units available in LyX.
48096 \begin_layout Standard
48097 \begin_inset Float table
48103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48104 \begin_inset Caption
48106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48122 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48130 \begin_inset Tabular
48131 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
48132 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
48133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
48134 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
48136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48285 scaled point (65536
48286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48346 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48401 % of original image width
48408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48615 \begin_layout Chapter
48617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48619 name "chap:Credits"
48626 \begin_layout Standard
48627 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48628 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48631 \begin_layout Itemize
48634 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48637 \begin_layout Itemize
48643 \begin_layout Itemize
48649 \begin_layout Itemize
48655 \begin_layout Itemize
48661 \begin_layout Itemize
48667 \begin_layout Itemize
48673 \begin_layout Itemize
48679 \begin_layout Itemize
48682 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48685 \begin_layout Itemize
48691 \begin_layout Itemize
48697 \begin_layout Itemize
48703 \begin_layout Itemize
48709 \begin_layout Itemize
48715 \begin_layout Itemize
48721 \begin_layout Itemize
48727 \begin_layout Itemize
48733 \begin_layout Itemize
48735 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48744 \begin_layout Standard
48745 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48748 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48755 \begin_layout Bibliography
48756 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48758 LatexCommand bibitem
48765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48768 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
48773 \begin_inset Newline newline
48777 \begin_inset Flex URL
48780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48782 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
48790 \begin_layout Bibliography
48791 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48792 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48793 LatexCommand bibitem
48794 key "latexcompanion"
48798 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
48800 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
48803 Addison-Wesley, 2004
48806 \begin_layout Bibliography
48807 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48809 LatexCommand bibitem
48814 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
48817 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
48820 Addison-Wesley, 2003
48823 \begin_layout Bibliography
48824 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48825 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48826 LatexCommand bibitem
48833 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
48836 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
48839 \begin_layout Bibliography
48840 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48841 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48842 LatexCommand bibitem
48854 Addison-Wesley, 1984
48857 \begin_layout Bibliography
48858 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48859 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48860 LatexCommand bibitem
48866 \begin_inset Newline newline
48870 \begin_inset Flex URL
48873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48875 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
48883 \begin_layout Bibliography
48884 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48885 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48886 LatexCommand bibitem
48892 \begin_inset Newline newline
48896 \begin_inset Flex URL
48899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48901 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
48909 \begin_layout Bibliography
48910 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48911 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48912 LatexCommand bibitem
48918 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48920 name "Documentation"
48921 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
48930 \begin_inset Newline newline
48934 \begin_inset Flex URL
48937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48939 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
48947 \begin_layout Bibliography
48948 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48949 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48950 LatexCommand bibitem
48956 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48958 name "Documentation"
48959 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
48963 how to use the program
48968 \begin_inset Newline newline
48972 \begin_inset Flex URL
48975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48977 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
48985 \begin_layout Bibliography
48986 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
48987 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48988 LatexCommand bibitem
48994 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48996 name "Documentation"
48997 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49006 \begin_inset Newline newline
49010 \begin_inset Flex URL
49013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49015 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49023 \begin_layout Bibliography
49024 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49025 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49026 LatexCommand bibitem
49032 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49034 name "Documentation"
49035 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49044 \begin_inset Newline newline
49048 \begin_inset Flex URL
49051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49053 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49061 \begin_layout Bibliography
49062 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49063 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49064 LatexCommand bibitem
49070 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49072 name "Documentation"
49073 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf"
49077 of the LaTeX-package
49082 \begin_inset Index idx
49085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49086 LaTeX-packages ! caption
49092 \begin_inset Newline newline
49096 \begin_inset Flex URL
49099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49101 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf
49109 \begin_layout Bibliography
49110 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49111 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49112 LatexCommand bibitem
49118 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49120 name "Documentation"
49121 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49125 of the LaTeX-package
49130 \begin_inset Index idx
49133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49134 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
49140 \begin_inset Newline newline
49144 \begin_inset Flex URL
49147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49149 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49157 \begin_layout Bibliography
49158 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49159 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49160 LatexCommand bibitem
49166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49168 name "Documentation"
49169 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49173 of the LaTeX-package
49178 \begin_inset Index idx
49181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49182 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
49188 \begin_inset Newline newline
49192 \begin_inset Flex URL
49195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49197 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49205 \begin_layout Bibliography
49206 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49207 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49208 LatexCommand bibitem
49216 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49218 name "Documentation"
49219 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf"
49225 of the LaTeX-package
49230 \begin_inset Index idx
49233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49234 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
49240 \begin_inset Newline newline
49244 \begin_inset Flex URL
49247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49249 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf
49257 \begin_layout Bibliography
49258 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49259 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49260 LatexCommand bibitem
49266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49268 name "Documentation"
49269 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49273 of the LaTeX-package
49278 \begin_inset Index idx
49281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49282 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
49288 \begin_inset Newline newline
49292 \begin_inset Flex URL
49295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49297 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49305 \begin_layout Bibliography
49306 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49307 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49308 LatexCommand bibitem
49314 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49316 name "Documentation"
49317 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49321 of the LaTeX-package
49326 \begin_inset Index idx
49329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49330 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
49336 \begin_inset Newline newline
49340 \begin_inset Flex URL
49343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49345 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49353 \begin_layout Bibliography
49354 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49355 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49356 LatexCommand bibitem
49362 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49364 name "Documentation"
49365 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49369 of the LaTeX-package
49374 \begin_inset Index idx
49377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49378 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
49384 \begin_inset Newline newline
49388 \begin_inset Flex URL
49391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49393 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49401 \begin_layout Bibliography
49402 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49403 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49404 LatexCommand bibitem
49410 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49412 name "Documentation"
49413 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf"
49417 of the LaTeX-package
49422 \begin_inset Index idx
49425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49426 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
49432 \begin_inset Newline newline
49436 \begin_inset Flex URL
49439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49441 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf
49449 \begin_layout Bibliography
49450 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49452 LatexCommand bibitem
49458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49461 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49465 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
49466 \begin_inset Newline newline
49470 \begin_inset Flex URL
49473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49475 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49483 \begin_layout Bibliography
49484 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49486 LatexCommand bibitem
49492 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49495 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49499 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
49500 \begin_inset Newline newline
49504 \begin_inset Flex URL
49507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49509 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49517 \begin_layout Bibliography
49518 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49519 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49520 LatexCommand bibitem
49526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49529 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49533 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
49534 \begin_inset Newline newline
49538 \begin_inset Flex URL
49541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49543 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49551 \begin_layout Bibliography
49552 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49554 LatexCommand bibitem
49560 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49563 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
49567 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
49568 \begin_inset Newline newline
49572 \begin_inset Flex URL
49575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49577 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
49585 \begin_layout Bibliography
49586 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49587 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49588 LatexCommand bibitem
49594 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49597 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
49601 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
49602 \begin_inset Newline newline
49606 \begin_inset Flex URL
49609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49611 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
49619 \begin_layout Bibliography
49620 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49621 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49622 LatexCommand bibitem
49628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49631 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
49635 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
49636 \begin_inset Newline newline
49640 \begin_inset Flex URL
49643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49645 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
49653 \begin_layout Bibliography
49654 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49656 LatexCommand bibitem
49662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49665 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
49669 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
49670 \begin_inset Newline newline
49674 \begin_inset Flex URL
49677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49679 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
49687 \begin_layout Bibliography
49688 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49689 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49690 LatexCommand bibitem
49696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49699 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
49703 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
49704 \begin_inset Newline newline
49708 \begin_inset Flex URL
49711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49713 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
49721 \begin_layout Bibliography
49722 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49724 LatexCommand bibitem
49730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49733 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
49737 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
49738 \begin_inset Newline newline
49742 \begin_inset Flex URL
49745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49747 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
49755 \begin_layout Bibliography
49756 \labelwidthstring Literaturverzeichnis
49757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49758 LatexCommand bibitem
49764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49767 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
49771 about new features in
49776 \begin_inset Newline newline
49780 \begin_inset Flex URL
49783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49785 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
49793 \begin_layout Standard
49794 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49828 \begin_inset Note Note
49831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49838 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
49839 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
49840 bibliography is the second one:
49848 \begin_layout Standard
49849 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
49850 LatexCommand bibtex
49851 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
49852 options "biblio/alphadin"
49859 \begin_layout Standard
49860 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
49863 \begin_layout Standard
49864 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
49865 LatexCommand printnomenclature
49871 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
49872 LatexCommand printindex